Facsimile Guide
Please read this guide before operating this equipment.
ENG
After you finish reading this guide, store it in a safe place for future reference.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manuals for the Machine
The manuals for this machine are divided as follows. Please refer to them for detailed information.
The manuals supplied with optional equipment are included in the list below. Depending on the system
configuration and product purchased, some manuals may not be needed.
Guides with this symbol are PDF manuals included on the
Guides with this symbol are printed manuals.
CD-ROM
accompanying CD-ROM.
• Basic Operations
• Troubleshooting
Reference Guide
\
• Copying Instructions
Copying Guide
Facsimile Guide
• Fax Instructions
(This Document)
• Sending Function Instructions
Sending Function Guide
• Setting Up the Network Connection and
Installing the CD-ROM Software
Setup Guide
• Remote User Interface Instructions
CD-ROM
Remote UI Guide
• Network Connectivity and Setup Instructions
CD-ROM
Network Guide
• PS/PCL Printer Instructions
CD-ROM
PS/PCL Printer Guide
• PCL Printer Driver Installation and
Instructions
CD-ROM
PCL Driver Guide
• Fax Driver and Cover Sheet Editor Installation
and Instructions
Fax Driver Guide
with Cover Sheet Editor
CD-ROM
• The machine illustration on the cover may differ slightly from your machine.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How This Manual Is Organized
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 13
Chapter 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 15
Includes report samples, the specifications of the fax functions of this machine, and
the index.
• Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this manual is free of inaccuracies and omissions.
• However, as we are constantly improving our products, if you need an exact specification, please contact Canon.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xi
How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xi
Legal Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiii
Users in Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Disclaimers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Main Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Control Panel Parts and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Connecting the Telephone Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Setting the Telephone Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Setting the Current Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Registering This Machine’s Fax Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Registering the Unit’s Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Registering Sender Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Overview of Speed Dialing Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Setting Up Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
One-Touch Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Coded Speed Dialing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Group Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Access Code Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Using Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
One-Touch Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Coded Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Group Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Directory Dialing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Access Code Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Flow of Fax Sending Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Placing Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Platen Glass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Feeder (ADF-J1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Document Stamp Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Setting the Stamp Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Sending Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Book Sending. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Memory Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Direct Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Using Regular Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Redialing When the Line Is Busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Automatic Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Manual Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Canceling Send Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Canceling Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Checking Transaction Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Transmission Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Setting Up the ECM for Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Pause Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Time Out Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
TX Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending Documents at a Preset Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Setting Up and Using PIN Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Setting a PIN Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Forced PIN Code Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
Receiving Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Available Paper Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Receive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Setting the ECM for Receiving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
RX Page Footer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
2 on 1 Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Printing Received Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Number of Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Printing Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Printing in Reduced Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Transferring Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Transfer Box Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Creating a Transfer Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Changing Transfer Box Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Deleting a Transfer Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Using a Transfer Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using a Memory Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
What Is Relay Broadcasting? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Creating a Relay Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Deleting a Relay Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Using Relay Broadcasting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Chapter 8 Confidential Mailboxes
What Is a Confidential Mailbox?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Setting Up a Confidential Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Confidential Mailbox Setting Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Creating a Confidential Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Using a Confidential Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Receiving a Confidential Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Sending a Confidential Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Sending a Confidential Document
What Is Polling? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Before You Use Polling Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Polling Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Polling to Receive at a Preset Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Preset Time Polling Box Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Creating a Preset Time Polling Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Polling Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Polling Box Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Deleting a Polling Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Using Tone Dialing on a Pulse Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Program One-Touch Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
List of Available Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Setting the TX/RX Start Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Adjusting the Scanning Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Setting the RX Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12
Changing the Fax Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-16
Setting Up Line 2 for Fax Transmissions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-3
Selecting the Dialing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-5
Changing the Start Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-7
Line Selection When Sending a Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10
Sending a Fax on Line 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13
Cancel an Outgoing Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14
Receiving a Fax on Line 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
Cancel an Incoming Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
Setting Reports to Print Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-2
RX Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Confidential RX Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Activity Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Printing the Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Printing the List of Fax Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
When Problems Occur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Sending Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Receiving Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Other Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Questions and Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Fax Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Chapter 15 Appendix
Report Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
One-Touch Speed Dialing List 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
One-Touch Speed Dialing List 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Coded Speed Dialing List 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Coded Speed Dialing List 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Group Dialing List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Access Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
User’s Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
Error Transmission (TX) Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
Multi-Transaction (TX/RX) Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
Relay Broadcast Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
Confidential Mailbox List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
Document Memory List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
Memory Clear Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
Thank you for purchasing the Canon imageRUNNER 2010F. Please read this manual
thoroughly before operating the machine in order to familiarize yourself with its capabilities,
and to make the most of its many functions. After reading this manual, store it in a safe place
for future reference.
How to Use This Manual
Symbols Used in This Manual
The following symbols are used in this manual to explain procedures, restrictions,
handling precautions, and instructions that should be observed for safety.
WARNING
CAUTION
Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or
injury to persons if not performed correctly. In order to use the machine
safely, always pay attention to these warnings.
Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to
persons, or damage to property if not performed correctly. In order to
use the machine safely, always pay attention to these cautions.
Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read
these items carefully in order to operate the machine correctly, and to
avoid damage to the machine.
IMPORTANT
NOTE
Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional
explanations for a procedure. Reading these notes is highly
recommended.
Keys Used in This Manual
The following symbols and key names are a few examples of how keys to be
pressed are expressed in this manual:
• Control Panel Keys: <Key icon> + (Key Name)
Example:
(Start)
(Stop)
• Function Keys: <Key icon> + (Key Function)
F3
Example:
Press [F3] (DENSITY)
F4
Press [F4] (▲)
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Legal Notices
FCC (Federal Communications Commission)
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
Operator's Manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his
own expense.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise
specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications should be made, you
could be required to stop operation of the equipment.
Users in the U.S.A.
PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR CANON FACSIMILE
EQUIPMENT
A.Location
Supply an suitable table, cabinet, or desk. See the Appendix of the Reference
Guide for the unit's dimensions and weight.
B.Order Information
1. Only a single telephone line (touch-tone or rotary) is to be used.
2. Order an RJ11-C telephone wall jack (USOC), which should be installed by the
phone company. If the RJ11-C wall jack is not present, telephone/facsimile
operation is not possible.
3. Order a normal business line from your telephone company's business
representative. The line should be a regular voice grade line or the equivalent.
Use one line per unit.
DDD (Direct Distance Dial) line
-or-
IDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) line if you communicate overseas
xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE
Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards, i.e., 2500 (Touch
Tone) or 500 (Rotary/Pulse Dial) telephones. A dedicated extension off a PBX unit
without "Call Waiting" can be used with your facsimile unit. Key telephone systems are
not recommended because they send non-standard signals to individual telephones for
ringing, or send special codes that may cause a facsimile error.
C.Power Requirements
The machine should be connected to a standard 120 volt AC, three-wire grounded
outlet only. Do not connect this unit to an outlet or power line shared with other
appliances that cause "electrical noise." Air conditioners, electric typewriters,
copiers, and machines of this sort generate electrical noise that often interferes
with communications equipment and the sending and receiving of documents.
CONNECTION OF THE EQUIPMENT
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the rear panel of this
equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC Registration
Number and Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment. If requested,
this information should be given to the telephone company. (Note: REN is not
required for some types of analog or digital facilities.) This equipment cannot be
used on the public coin service provided by the telephone company. Connection to
party lines is subject to state tariffs. (Contact the state public utility commission,
public service commission or corporation commission for information.)
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to the
telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not
ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the
RENs should not exceed five (5.0).To be certain of the number of devices that may
be connected to the line as determined by the total amount of RENs, contact the
telephone company to determine the maximum RENs for the calling area.
An FCC compliant telephone line cable and modular plug is provided with this
equipment. This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network
or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack that is Part 68 compliant.
(Note: RENs are associated with loop-start and ground-start ports. Do not use for
E&M or digital ports.)
Even if the dual-line option is installed, the REN is applicable to each port. This
equipment if it uses an optional telephone receiver is hearing aid compatible.
xiv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IN CASE OF EQUIPMENT MALFUNCTION
Should any malfunction occur which cannot be corrected by the procedures
described in this guide or the Reference Guide, disconnect the equipment from the
telephone line cable and disconnect the power cord. The telephone line cable
should not be reconnected or the switch turned on until the problem is completely
resolved. Users should contact their local authorized Canon Facsimile Service
Dealer for servicing of equipment.
RIGHTS OF THE TELEPHONE COMPANY
If the equipment (imageRUNNER 2010F) causes harm to the telephone network,
the telephone company may temporarily disconnect service. The telephone
company also retains the right to make changes in facilities and services that may
affect the operation of this equipment. When such changes are necessary, the
telephone company is required to give adequate prior notice to the user. However, if
advance notice is impossible, the telephone company will notify the customer as
soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the
FCC if you believe it is necessary.
WARNING
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise
specified in the Reference Guide. If such changes or modifications should be
made, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.
NOTE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a
commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the Reference Guide,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in
a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his or her own expense.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use
a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone facsimile
machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each
transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and
an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message
and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or
individual. In order to program this information into your facsimile machine, you should
complete the procedure to register your name, unit number, time, and date in Chapter 1.
(For instructions explaining how to enter characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations,"
in the Reference Guide.)
xv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Users in Canada
PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR CANON FACSIMILE
EQUIPMENT
A.Location
Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk. See brochure for unit's dimensions and
weight.
B.Order Information
1. Provide only a signal line touch-tone or rotary telephone set terminated with a
standard 4-pin modular phone plug. (Touch-tone is recommended if available in
your area.)
2. Order a CA11A modular jack that should be installed by the phone company. If
the CA11A jack is not present, installation cannot occur.
3. Order a normal business line from your telephone company's business
representative. The line should be a regular voice grade line or the equivalent.
Use one line per unit.
DDD (Direct Distance Dial) Line
- or -
IDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) line if you communicate overseas
NOTE
Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards such as 2500 (Touch
Tone) or 500 (Rotary/Pulse Dial) telephones. A dedicated extension off a PBX unit
without "Call Waiting" can be used with your facsimile unit. Key telephone systems are
not recommended because they send nonstandard signals to individual telephones for
ringing, or send special codes that may cause a facsimile error.
C.Power Requirements
The power outlet should be a three-prong grounded receptacle (Single or Duplex).
It should be independent from copiers, heaters, air conditioners or any electric
equipment that is thermostatically controlled. The rated value is 115 volts and 15
amperes. The CA11A modular jack should be relatively close to the power outlet to
facilitate installation.
Notice
• This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment
Technical Specifications. This is confirmed by the registration number. The
abbreviation, IC, before the registration number signifies that registration was
performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met. It does not imply that Industry Canada
approved the equipment.
xvi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be
connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The
equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In
some cases, the company's inside wiring associated with a single line individual
service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone
extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above
conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
• The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this terminal equipment is 0.3. The
REN assigned to each terminal equipment provides an indication of the maximum
number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The
termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only
to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the
devices does not exceed five.
• Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian
maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made
by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the
telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the
equipment.
• Complies with the Canadian ICES-003 class A limits.
• Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground
connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe
system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly
important in rural areas.
CAUTION
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should
contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as
appropriate.
NOTE
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian interference
Causing Equipment Regulations.
xvii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilisation au Canada
CONDITIONS À REMPLIR PRÉALABLEMENT À L'INSTALLATION D'UN
TÉLÉCOPIEUR CANON
A.Emplacement
Prévoir une table, un meuble, ou un bureau suffisamment solide et de taille
appropriée (le poids et les dimensions de l'appareil sont indiqués dans la
brochure).
B.Installation téléphonique
1. Cet appareil peut être installé comme un appareil téléphonique à clavier ou à
cadran et doit être raccordé à une seule ligne.
2. Il faut commander un jack modulaire CA11A qui sera installé par la compagnie
téléphonique. Sans ce jack, la mise en place serait impossible.
3. Si vous vous abonnez à une nouvelle ligne, demandez une ligne d'affaires
normale de qualité téléphonique courante ou équivalente. Prenez un
abonnement d'une ligne par appareil.
Ligne automatique interurbaine
- ou -
Ligne automatique internationale
(si vous communiquez avec les pays étrangers)
NOTE
Canon vous conseille d'utiliser une ligne individuelle conforme aux normes industrielles,
à savior: ligne téléphonique 2500 (pour appareil à clavier) ou 500 (pour appareil à
cadran/impulsions), Il est également possible de raccorder ce télécopieur à un système
téléphonique à poussoirs car la plupart de ces systèmes émettent des signaux d'appel
non normalisés ou des codes spéciaux qui risquent de perturber le fonctionnement du
télécopieur.
C.Condition d'alimentation
Raccordez le télécopieur à une prise de courant plus terre à trois branches, du type
simple ou double, et qui ne sert pas à alimenter un copieur, un appareil de
chauffage, un climatiseur ou tout autre appareil électrique à thermostat.
L'alimentation doit être de 115 volts et 15 ampères. Pour faciliter l'installation, le
jack CA11A doit être assez proche de la prise de courant.
xviii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMARQUES
• Cet appareil est conforme aux Spécifications techniques des équipements
terminaux de l’Industrie du Canada. Ceci est confirmé par le numéro
d’enregistrement. L’abréviation IC précédant le numéro d’enregistrement signifie
que l’enregistrement a été effectué sur la base de la Déclaration de conformité
indiquant que le produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques du Canada.
Ceci n’implique pas que le produit ait été approuvé par l’industrie du Canada.
• Avant d'installer cet appareil, l'utilisateur doit s'assurer qu'il est permis de le
connecter à l'équipement de la compagnie de télécommunication locale et doit
installer cet appareil en utilisant une méthode de connexion autorisée. Il se peut
qu'il faille étendre la circuiterie intérieure de la ligne individuelle d'abonné, qui a
été installée par la compagnie, au moyen d'un jeu de connecteurs homoloqués
(rallonge téléphonique). L'attention de l'utilisateur est attirée sur le fait le respect
des conditions mentionnées ci-dessus ne constitue pas une garantie contre les
dégradations de qualité du service dans cetaines circonstances.
• Le Nombre d’équivalence Ringer (REN) de cet appareil terminal est 0.3. Le REN
attribué à chaque équipement terminal fournit une indication sur le nombre
maximum de terminaux pouvant être connectés sur une interface téléphonique.
La terminaison sur une interface peut consister en n’importe quelle combinaison
d’appareils, à la condition seulement que la somme des Nombres d’équivalence
Ringer de tous les appareils ne soit pas supérieure à 5.
• Les réparations sur un appareil certifié doivent être faites par une société
d'entretien canadienne autorisée par le Gouvernement canadien et désignée par
le fournisseur.
Toute réparation ou modification que pourrait faire I'utilisateur de cet appareil, ou
tout mauvais fonctionnement, donne à la compagnie de télécommunication le
droit de débrancher I'appareil.
• Complies with the Canadian ICES-003 class A limits.
Respecte les limites de la classe A de la NMB-003 du Canada.
• Pour sa propre protection, I'utilisateur doits'assurer que les prises de terre de
I'appareil d'alimentation, les lignes téléphoniques et les tuyaux métalliques
internes, s'ily en a, sont bien connectés entre eux. Cette précaution est
particuliérement importante dans les zones rurales.
CAUTION
Au lieu d'essayer de faire ces branshements eux-mêmes, les utilisateurs sont
invités à faire appel à un service d'inspection faisant autorité en matière
d'électricité ou à un électricien, selon le cas.
NOTE
Cet appareil nemérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Réglement sur
le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
xix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trademarks
Canon, the Canon logo, and imageRUNNER are trademarks of Canon Inc.
Other product and company names herein may be the trademarks of their respective
owners.
Copyright
Copyright 2002 by Canon Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means,
electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, or by any information
storage or retrieval system without the prior written permission of Canon Inc.
Disclaimers
The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR AGAINST
INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT. CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES
OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.
xx
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Use the Fax Functions
1
CHAPTER
This chapter explains what you should know before using this machine for faxing, and
describes its main features.
Overview of the imageRUNNER 2010F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Control Panel Parts and Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Connecting the Telephone Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Setting the Telephone Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Registering the Required Sender Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Registering the Unit’s Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Registering the Sender Information (TX Terminal ID). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Registering Sender Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview of the imageRUNNER 2010F
In addition to standard fax transmission and document copying functions, this
machine offers you a variety of other features in accordance with your needs.
1
Main Features
■ Various Fax Features
• When sending, you can set the document resolution, image quality and contrast suitable
• You can select from Book, Memory, or Direct Sending.
• You can perform several jobs without waiting for the current job to be finished. For
example, you can print a received document while sending a document stored in the
memory.
■ Easy to Use
• You can store up to 63 numbers for one-touch speed dialing, enabling you to send a fax
by pressing a single key.You can also store 137 numbers for coded speed dialing, by
designating a three-digit code for each of them. Multiple one-touch and coded speed
dialing entries can be registered in a group. Additionally, you can quickly find a fax
number by entering the destination’s name you have registered. (Chapter 2, “Speed
Dialing.”)
• You can register a frequently used setting to a program one-touch key so you can
■ Fax/Telephone Information Services
A range of fax/telephone information services, including business and tourism related
■ Efficient and Confidential Transactions
• Memory Box features (confidential, relay, polling and transfer boxes) enable you to make
• By specifying the ITU-T subaddress and password, you can perform a highly confidential
Overview of the imageRUNNER 2010F
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-2
■ Monitoring Transactions and Checking Settings
• You can check a list of documents being sent or waiting to be sent by simply pressing
■ Additional Functions with Optional Equipment Installed
• You can send documents to an e-mail address. Sent documents are attached to the
e-mail as image files. This enables the receiving party to view the contents of the
documents on their computer monitor. (See the Sending Function Guide.)
1
• If the optional Canon Super G3 FAX Expansion Kit-B1 is installed, you can set a
dedicated telephone line for either outgoing or incoming fax transmissions. (See Chapter
Overview of the imageRUNNER 2010F
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-3
Control Panel Parts and Functions
One-Touch Speed Dialing Panels Closed
1 2
3
4
5
6
7
8 9
0 A B CD E F G
1
Counter
Display Contrast
Energy Saver
Coded
Dial
Pause/
Redial
Check
Monitor
Directory
Hook
Tone
Line/Mail Direct TX
COPY
FAX
PRINT
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Clear
Collate Special Features
Reset
C
Stop
GHI
JKL
MNO
Reduce
1
Enlarge
2
Additional Functions
Interrupt
Start
01
08
15
02
03
04
11
18
05
12
19
06
13
20
07
14
21
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
Two Page Separation Frame Erase
09
16
10
17
F1
F2
F3
F4
3
4
OPER
SYMBOLS
BACK
OK
0
ID
~
22 42
~
43 63
Power
In Use Memory
Alarm
W V
U
T
S
R QP O N
MLKJ
I
H
a
b
c
i
Counter key
Press to check the counter information.
Energy Saver key
Press to enter or cancel the Energy Saver mode.
When the machine is in the Energy Saver mode,
only the Energy Saver indicator and the main
power indicator light and the other keys and
indicators are turned OFF.
Display Contrast dial
Rotate to adjust the contrast of the LCD display.
LCD display
Displays messages and prompts during
operation. Displays selections, text, numbers,
and names when registering information.
j
k
Directory key
Press to search for fax/telephone numbers by the
name under which they are registered for speed
dialing and then use the number for dialing.
d
COPY, FAX, PRINT keys
Press to switch the machine to the Copy, Fax or
Printer functions.
Coded Dial key
Press this key and a three-digits code to dial a
fax/telephone number that you have registered
for coded speed dialing.
e
f
Monitor key
Press to check the transaction or copying status.
l
m
Hook key
Reset key
Press to activate or deactivate the telephone line.
Press to return to the Basic Features screen, or
to stop scanning or sending documents.
Pause/Redial key
g
h
Numeric keys
Press to enter the numbers or letters.
Press to redial the last number dialed when the
display shows the Basic Features screen or to
enter a pause between or after dialing or
registering the telephone/fax numbers.
Clear key
Press to delete the numbers or letters entered.
Overview of the imageRUNNER 2010F
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
n
o
p
q
y
z
Tone key
In Use Memory lamp
Switches to tone dialing temporarily when your
machine is connected to a pulse line.
A light that blinks red or maintains a steady green
light when the machine is copying or there are
documents stored in memory.
Line/Mail key
Press to select the telephone line or send an I-
fax.
Interrupt key
Press to interrupt a continuous copy job when
you need to make priority copies.
Direct TX indicator
Lights when Direct Sending is selected as the
sending method.
1
A
B
C
Additional Functions key
Press to enter the Additional Functions menu.
Direct TX key
OK key
Press to set a mode or function.
Press to use the Direct Sending method, which
enables you to send a document ahead of other
documents stored in memory.
BACK key
Press to go back to the previous screen when
adjusting settings in a menu.
r
s
One-touch speed dialing panels
The first panel displays keys 01 to 21. Open the
first panel to access keys 22 to 42. Open the
second panel to access keys 43 to 63. Open the
third panel to access the Fax function keys.
D
E
Function keys (F1 to F4)
Select options that appear on the LCD display.
Special Features key
Press to set special copying features, such as
Two-Page Separation, Image Combination,
Margin, and Frame Erase.
One-touch speed dialing keys
Press to dial numbers registered under one-touch
speed dialing keys or access the Fax functions
when registered as program one-touch keys.
F
Copy shortcut keys (1 to 4)
Press to use registered special copying features.
The default settings are as follows:
t
u
Main Power indicator
Lights when the main power is turned ON.
1: Reduce
Stop key
2: Enlarge
Press to return to the Basic Features screen, or
to stop scanning, printing copies or sending a fax.
3: Two-Page Separation
4: Frame Erase
v
w
Start key
Press to start an operation.
You can change the Copy Shortcut keys settings
in the Copy Settings menu from the Additional
Functions menu.
ID key
Press in order to use the Department ID
Management function.
G
Collate key
Press to turn ON/OFF the finisher functions, such
as Collate or Rotate. If the optional Finisher-L1 is
attached, you can also select the stapler function.
x
Alarm lamp
Lights or blinks red when an error occurs. If the
alarm lamp blinks, solve the problem by following
the instructions on the LCD display. If the alarm
lamp maintains a steady red light, call for your
local authorized Canon dealer.
Overview of the imageRUNNER 2010F
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-5
One-Touch Speed Dialing Panels Open
5
7
1
2
3
4
6
Delayed
Advanced
Memory
Reception
Transfer
Delete
Transmission Communication
1
Memory
Report
Stamp
TTI Selector
Pin Code
Space
Reference
Stack Bypass
Settings
+
Clear
OK
A
G F E D
B
0
9
8
C
a
b
j
Delayed Transmission key
Press to set a time for delayed sending.
Clear key
Clears an entire entry during information
registration.
Advanced Communication key
Press to set a document for advanced
communications such as polling sending/
receiving, confidential mailbox, relay broadcast,
and subaddress/password transmission.
k
l
+ key
Press this key to enter a plus sign in a fax
number.
Pin Code key
c
d
Transfer key
Press to use the transfer mode, or to cancel it.
Displays the PIN code message so you can enter
a PIN code when dialing through a PBX (Public
Branch Exchange).
Memory Reception key
Press to turn ON/OFF the memory reception
function.
m
TTI Selector key
Enters a registered sender’s name which is
printed at the top of the document you are
sending.
e
Space key
Enters a space between letters and numbers
when registering information.
n
o
Stamp key
Switches the machine in and out of the Stamp
mode.
f
g
Speaker volume switch
Adjusts the speaker Volume in four levels.
Report key
Prints reports about information registered in the
machine.
Delete key
During a step when you are registering a name,
press this key to delete the character you entered
last.
p
q
Stack Bypass Settings key
Press to set the paper size for the stack bypass.
h
i
OK key
Press to set a mode or function.
Memory Reference key
Performs operations with documents currently
stored in memory, including printing a list of
documents, printing documents, sending
documents to another destination, or deleting
documents.
, , ▲, ▼Cursor keys
Press to scroll through options and selections in
the menus on the display during data registration,
or to move the cursor left or right during data
registration.
Overview of the imageRUNNER 2010F
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
After installation, you need to set up the machine to begin using the fax function. If
the connection or the registered information is not correct, the machine will not
function properly.
1
Connecting the Telephone Line
Before turning the power ON, connect the telephone line to the machine.
1
Connect one end of the telephone line to the line jack marked
.
Line Jack
2
Connect the other end of the telephone line to your wall
telephone jack.
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-7
Setting the Telephone Line Type
In order to operate your machine, you must know if your machine is connected to a
touch tone or rotary pulse line. If you are not sure of the type of telephone line you
have, check with your local telephone company, and if you need to change the
factory default telephone line setting, follow the procedure below.
1
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions].
The ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS>
➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 USER SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The USER SETTINGS menu appears.
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-8
F3
F4
4
5
6
7
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 TEL LINE
SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
OK
1
The TEL LINE SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 TEL LINE TYPE>
➞ press [OK].
OK
The TEL LINE TYPE menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 TOUCH TONE> or
<02 ROTARY PULSE> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The telephone line type is registered, and the display returns to the TEL LINE
SETTINGS menu.
Reset
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Current Date and Time
You must set the current date and time. The date and time is printed on the top of
every document you send. It is also used as required for functions that have timer
settings.
1
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions].
The ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS menu appears, and the indicator light
blinks.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <05 TIMER SETTINGS>
➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The TIMER SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 DATE/TIME
SETTING> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The DATE/TIME SETTING menu appears.
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-10
F2
F3
4
Press [F2] ( ) or [F3] ( ) to select the month, day, year, and
time ➞ enter the current date and time using the numeric
keys.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Enter the date, and time in 24-hour notation, with four digits and no space.
Enter two digits for the year.
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
Examples:
May 6 → 0506
OPER
SYMBOLS
1
0
7:05 a.m. → 0705
11:18 p.m. → 2318
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering values, press
values.
(Clear)
➞
enter the correct
C
OK
5
6
Press [OK].
The date and time is set, and the display returns to the TIMER SETTINGS menu.
Reset
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-11
Registering the Required Sender Information
According to recent amendments to the FCC (Federal Communications
Commission) rules governing the use of facsimile equipment in the United States,
the following sender information must be printed on every facsimile transmission.
1
• Your fax number
• Your personal name or company’s name
• Date and time of transmission
The sender information you register is printed as shown below.
After your fax is received, the other party knows immediately where it came from
because your sender information is printed at the top of every page you send.
• If the TX TERMINAL ID is set to ‘OUTSIDE IMAGE’:
Page Number/ Total
Number of Pages
Unit’s Name or
Sender’s Name
Date and Time Fax Number
2001 11/12 10:07
FAX 111 2222
JOHN
001/001
• If the TX TERMINAL ID is set to ‘INSIDE IMAGE’:
Page Number/ Total
Number of Pages
Unit’s Name or
Sender’s Name
Date and Time Fax Number
2001 11/12 10:07
FAX 111 2222
JOHN
001/001
NOTE
•
•
If you set the TX TERMINAL ID to ‘01 ON’, and there are unregistered items, only the
registered items and the page number are printed on the documents.
Registering the Required Sender Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-12
■ Date and Time
Date and time of the transmission.
■ Fax Number
Your fax number.
■ Unit’s Name or Sender’s Name
Select a unit’s name or a sender’s name by pressing [TTI Selector] before scanning a
document for sending.
1
■ Page Number/Total Number of Pages
The page number of the document out of the total number of pages.
Registering This Machine’s Fax Number
Follow the procedure below to register the number of your machine.
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions].
The ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS>
➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
Registering the Required Sender Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-13
F3
F4
3
4
5
6
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 USER SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
OK
1
The USER SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 TEL LINE
SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The TEL LINE SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 USER TEL NO.> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The USER TEL NO. menu appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Use the numeric keys to enter your fax number ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
Your fax number is registered, and the display returns to the TEL LINE SETTINGS
menu.
NOTE
•
If you entered a wrong number, use the cursor keys to go back to the position you
want to correct ➞ press (Delete) enter the correct number.
To delete the entire entry, press (Clear).
➞
•
Registering the Required Sender Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-14
Reset
7
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Registering the Unit’s Name
Follow the procedure below to register the unit’s name. The unit’s name can be the
name of the company or department, or a personal name.
1
The unit’s name you register is printed as the TX Terminal ID on the document the
other party receives.
NOTE
For details about entering letters, see Chapter 2, “Basic Operations,” in the Reference
Guide.
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
OK
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 USER SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The USER SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 UNIT NAME> ➞
press [OK].
OK
Registering the Required Sender Information
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The UNIT NAME menu appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
4
5
Enter the unit’s name using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
1
OK
The unit’s name is registered, and the display returns to the USER SETTINGS
menu.
NOTE
•
•
The unit’s name can be up to 24 characters long.
If you entered a wrong letter, use the cursor keys to go back to the position you
want to correct ➞ press
(Delete)
➞
enter the correct letter.
•
To delete the entire entry, press
(Clear).
Reset
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Registering the Sender Information (TX Terminal ID)
Follow the procedure below to select whether to send documents with the TX
Terminal ID.
The TX Terminal ID is printed on the top of every page the other party receives,
telling the recipient the sender’s name and fax number.
IMPORTANT
In the United States, this setting must be ‘ON’. Please see “FCC (Federal
in the United States.
NOTE
•
If you set the TX TERMINAL ID to ‘01 ON’, you can select the position where the TX
Terminal ID appears on the recording paper, and also select a Telephone Number Mark.
•
The default settings are as follows:
- TX Terminal ID:‘01 ON’
- TX Terminal ID position:‘01 OUTSIDE IMAGE’
- Telephone Number Mark: ‘01 FAX’
Registering the Required Sender Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-16
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
1
OK
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 USER SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The USER SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
3
4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <04 TX TERMINAL ID>
➞ press [OK].
OK
The TX TERMINAL ID menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight the transmission type
➞ press [OK].
<01 FAX>: Set whether to print TX Terminal ID on outgoing fax documents.
<02 I-FAX>: Set whether to print TX Terminal ID on outgoing I-fax documents.
<03 FTP>: Set whether to print TX Terminal ID on outgoing documents via FTP.
OK
Registering the Required Sender Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-17
The transmission type settings menu appears.
F3
F4
5
6
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 ON> ➞ press [OK].
If you do not want the TX Terminal ID printed on the documents the recipients
receive, select <02 OFF> ➞ press [OK].
OK
1
The TX TERMINAL ID menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 TTI POSITON> or
<02 TEL NUMBER MARK>.
The display returns to the USER SETTINGS menu.
● If you selected <01 TTI POSITION>:
OK
❑ Press [OK] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 OUTSIDE IMAGE> or
<02 INSIDE IMAGE> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
<01 OUTSIDE IMAGE>: This prints the TX Terminal ID outside the image
area on the output fax.
OK
<02 INSIDE IMAGE>: This prints the TX Terminal ID inside the image area
on the output fax.
The display returns to the TX TERMINAL ID menu.
● If you selected <02 TEL NUMBER MARK>:
OK
F3
❑ Press [OK] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 FAX> or <02 TEL>
➞ press [OK].
<01 FAX>: This prints the letters <FAX> before the telephone number.
<02 TEL>: This prints the letters <TEL> before the telephone number.
F4
OK
Registering the Required Sender Information
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The display returns to the TX TERMINAL ID menu.
NOTE
1
•
If you selected <02 I-FAX> or <03 FTP> in step 4, the display for selecting the TTI
POSITION appears.You also cannot select <TEL NUMBER MARK>.
•
If you set the TX TERMINAL ID to ‘01 ON’, your ID is printed on every document
Reset
7
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Registering Sender Names
Follow the procedure below to register sender names. Registering alternative
sender names is optional, but you may want to register sender names if several
people are using the same machine to send documents.
If each user registers his or her personal name as a sender name, you can select
one of these names just before sending a document, their name instead of the
unit's name, will be printed at the top of the documents they send.
NOTE
• You can register up to 99 sender names.
•
•
To enter a sender’s name, you can also press
(TTI Selector) when you scan the
Additional Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
OK
Registering the Required Sender Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-19
F3
F4
2
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 USER SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu
OK
option becomes highlighted.
1
The USER SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
3
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 SENDER NAME>
➞ press [OK].
OK
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to select a number under which you
want to register a sender name ➞ press [OK].
OK
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 SENDER NAME
REG.> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The display for entering the sender’s name appears.
Registering the Required Sender Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-20
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
6
Enter the sender’s name (up to 24 characters) using the
numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
1
The sender’s name is registered, and the display returns to the SENDER NAME
menu.
NOTE
•
If you entered a wrong letter, use the cursor keys to go back to the position you
want to correct ➞ press
(Delete) ➞ enter the correct letter.
•
To delete the entire entry, press
(Clear).
• For details about entering letters, see Chapter 2, “Basic Operations,” in the
Reference Guide.
F3
F4
7
8
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 PERSONAL
SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The PERSONAL SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 SENDER FAX
NUMBER> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The SENDER FAX NUMBER menu appears.
Registering the Required Sender Information
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F3
F4
9
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 USER TEL
NUMBER> or <02 OTHER FAX NUMBERS>.
1
● If you selected <01 USER TEL NUMBER>:
❑ Press [OK].
OK
The user’s telephone number is registered as the sender fax number, and the
display returns to the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu.
● If you selected <02 OTHER FAX NUMBERS>:
OK
❑ Press [OK] ➞ Enter the fax number using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PRS
7
TUV
8
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The number you entered is registered as the sender fax number, and the
display returns to the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu.
F3
10 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 MAIL ACCOUNT>
➞ press [OK].
F4
OK
The display for selecting a MAIL ACCOUNT appears.
NOTE
If you have installed the optional I-Fax feature, you can use the e-mail address as
the TX Terminal ID.
Registering the Required Sender Information
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F3
F4
11 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight an e-mail account ➞
press [OK].
OK
1
The display returns to the SENDER NAME REG. menu.
Ω
Reset
12 Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Registering the Sender’s Fax Number
Follow this procedure to register the fax number of your machine. The registered
number is printed on the document received by the other party as the TX Terminal
ID.
The registered number can be either the user’s telephone number or any other fax
number you wish to appear on the document.
NOTE
The default setting is ‘01 USER TEL NUMBER’.
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
OK
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 USER SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu
OK
option becomes highlighted.
The USER SETTINGS menu appears.
Registering the Required Sender Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-23
F3
F4
3
4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <05 SENDER FAX
NUMBER> ➞ press [OK].
OK
1
The SENDER FAX NUMBER menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [▼] (F3) or [▲] (F4) to highlight <01 USER TEL
NUMBER> or <02 OTHER FAX NUMBERS>.
OK
● If you selected <01 USER TEL NUMBER>:
❑ Press [OK].
OK
The setting is complete, and the display returns to the USER SETTINGS
menu.
● If you selected <02 OTHER FAX NUMBERS>:
OK
❑ Press [OK] ➞ enter the fax number to register using the numeric keys ➞ press
[OK].
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PRS
7
TUV
8
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the USER SETTINGS menu.
NOTE
•
If you entered a wrong number, use the cursor keys to go back to the position you
want to correct press (Delete) enter the correct number.
To delete the entire entry, press (Clear).
➞
➞
•
Reset
5
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Registering the Required Sender Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-24
Speed Dialing
2
CHAPTER
This chapter introduces some basic dialing features, then shows you how to set up the speed
dialing keys.
Speed dialing includes One-Touch Speed Dialing, Coded Speed Dialing, Group Dialing,
Directory Dialing, and Access Code Dialing.
After you set up your speed dialing keys, we recommend that you occasionally print a list of all
telephone numbers registered in the machine, and store it for reference. (See “Printing the List
Overview of Speed Dialing Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Setting Up Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
One-Touch Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Using Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
One-Touch Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview of Speed Dialing Methods
Speed dialing enables you to streamline and customize dialing procedures by
registering a telephone number and other important settings so you can start a
document transmission while pressing only a few keys.
2
There are five methods of speed dialing:
■ One-Touch Speed Dialing
One-touch speed dialing enables you to start a document transmissions by pressing only
one key.You can register up to 63 destinations for one touch speed dialing.The first group
of keys numbered 1 to 21 are on the control panel. Open the first panel to see keys 22 to
42, then the second panel to see the last set of keys 43 to 63.
■ Coded Speed Dialing
Coded speed dialing enables you to start a document transmission by pressing [Coded
Dial] followed by a three-digit code of your choice using the numeric keys on the control
panel. While Coded Speed Dialing requires you to press more keys, it enables you to
register up to 137 numbers.
■ Group Dialing
Group dialing enables you to dial a group of registered one-touch or coded speed dialing
numbers. By registering each group under one-touch or coded speed dialing keys, you
press only one (or four keys) to send the same document to several locations.
■ Directory Dialing
Directory dialing enables you to look up and retrieve the other party’s name by pressing
[Directory] on the control panel.
■ Access Code Dialing
Access code dialing enables you to assign a two to five digit access code that you create
when registering numbers for one-touch speed dialing, coded speed dialing, and group
dialing.You can, for example, register the actual branch code of a company as the access
code for that branch.
Overview of Speed Dialing Methods
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-2
Setting Up Speed Dialing
This section describes how to register the most frequently used fax numbers you
dial under one-touch speed dialing keys, or a coded speed dialing code.
2
One-Touch Speed Dialing
You can register up to 63 numbers for one-touch speed dialing. Each speed dialing
key can contain a telephone number up to 120 digits, and a name up to 16
characters.
If you register multiple destinations to a one-touch speed dialing key, the key for
code can be used for group dialing.
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions].
The ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <04 ADD.
REGISTRATION> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The ADD. REGISTRATION menu appears.
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 1-TOUCH SPD
DIAL> ➞ press [OK].
OK
Setting Up Speed Dialing
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The display for registering a one-touch speed dialing key appears.
NOTE
If the optional network board is installed, <02 E-MAIL ADDRESS> and <03 FTP
SERVER> are also displayed.
F3
F4
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 TEL#
REGISTRATION> ➞ press [OK].
OK
2
The TEL# REGISTRATION menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight an empty number under
which you want to register a fax number ➞ press [OK].
An empty one-touch speed dialing key displays <NOT REGISTERED> next to
the speed dialing number.
OK
The names or fax numbers already registered are displayed to the right of the
speed dialing numbers.
IMPORTANT
You cannot register fax numbers for speed dialing numbers designated to the
program one-touch key.
F3
F4
6
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 TEL NUMBER
ENTRY> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The display for entering the fax number appears.
Setting Up Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-4
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
7
Use the numeric keys to enter the fax number (up to 120 digits
(including spaces) ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The message <DATA ENTRY OK> appears on the screen for about two seconds,
and the display returns to the TEL# REGISTRATION menu.
2
NOTE
•
•
To delete the fax number, press
If you entered a wrong number, use the cursor keys to go back to the position you
want to correct ➞ press (Delete) ➞ enter the correct number.
(Clear).
F3
F4
8
9
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 NAME> ➞ press
[OK].
OK
The display for entering the destination name appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Enter the name of the destination (up to 16 characters) ➞
press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The message <DATA ENTRY OK> appears on the screen for about two seconds,
the name of the destination is registered, and the display returns to the TEL#
REGISTRATION menu.
NOTE
For details about entering letters, see Chapter 2, “Basic Operations,” in the
Reference Guide.
Setting Up Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-5
F3
F4
10 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 OPTIONAL
SETTING> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The OPTIONAL SETTING menu appears.
2
F3
F4
11 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 OFF> or <02 ON> ➞
press [OK]
OK
If you selected <01 OFF>, the display returns to the TEL# REGISTRATION menu.
To continue registering other numbers, repeat the procedure from step 5.
If you selected <02 ON>, the OPTIONAL SETTING menu appears. Proceed to
the next step.
NOTE
From the OPTIONAL SETTING menu, you can set transmission features, such as
the access code, TX start time, ITU-T subaddress and password, international
sending, transmission speed, and ECM transmission.
F3
F4
12 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to set the desired optional setting ➞
press [OK].
OK
The display for setting the item you selected appears. The optional settings
include the following items:
Item
Description
Registers an access code from two to five digits to
ACCESS CODE
Setting Up Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-6
Item
Description
Preset a time to send documents stored in memory
automatically.
TX TIME SETTING
Designates the transactions as transmissions to a
confidential mailbox, part of a relay broadcast, or an
answer to a polling request.You can also set the ITU-T
subaddress and password for each feature.
TX TYPE
If you experience transmission errors during
international sending, change the international setting
to <INTERNATIONAL 1> and try to send the document
again. If the problem persists, select <INTERNATONAL
2>. If you still encounter a transmission error, select
<INTERNATIONAL 3>.
2
INTERNATIONAL
If transmission errors occur frequently while sending in
33.6 Kbps, select a slower speed: 14.4 Kbps, 9.6 Kbps,
4.8 Kbps, or 2.4 Kbps.
TX SPEED
ECM TX
ECM (Error Correction Mode) reduces system and line
errors during sending or receiving with another fax
machine that supports ECM.
If the optional Canon Super G3 FAX Expansion Kit-B1
TX LINE SELECTION is installed, you can set either telephone line for
outgoing fax transmissions.
Sets the sender’s name to appear on the documents
the other party receives.
SENDER NAME
● If you want to set an access code:
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 ACCESS CODE>
➞
press [OK].
OK
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
❑ Use the numeric keys to enter an access code (two to five digits)
➞
press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PRS
7
TUV
8
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the OPTIONAL SETTING menu.
NOTE
Setting Up Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-7
● If you want to select a preset time for the machine to automatically
send your documents:
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 TX TIME SETTING>
➞
press [OK].
OK
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight a preset time number (01 to 05)
➞
press
2
[OK].
You can set up to five times each day for the machine to automatically send
your documents.
OK
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
❑ Enter the time you want to start the transmission in 24-hour notation (e.g. 1:00
p.m. as 13:00) using the numeric keys
➞
press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PRS
7
TUV
8
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The message <DATA ENTRY OK> appears on the screen for about two
seconds, and the display returns to the TX TIME SETTING menu.
NOTE
•
•
If you want to cancel the time or set other optional settings, press
(BACK).
If you made a mistake entering the time, use the cursor keys to go back to the digit
you want to correct ➞ enter the correct digit.
•
To delete the entire entry, press
(Clear).
● If you want to select the transmission type:
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 TX TYPE>
F3
F4
➞
press [OK].
OK
Setting Up Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-8
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight a transmission type
➞
press [OK].
<01 REGULAR TX>: Sends a document to the registered fax number, without
using a subaddress or password.
OK
<02 CONFIDENTIAL TX>: Sends a document to the registered fax number
using the confidential mailbox feature.
<03 ORIG RELAY TX>: Sends a document to the registered fax number for a
relay broadcast.
<04 SUBADDRESS TX>: Sends a document with an ITU-T subaddress and/or
password to the registered fax number.
2
<05 POLLING RX>: Sends a polling request to the registered fax number that
holds the document you would like to receive.
F3
F4
❑ Set the ITU-T subaddress and password for the TX TYPE setting you select.
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to select <01 PASSWORD> or <02 SUBADDRESS>
➞
enter the subaddress or password using the numeric keys
➞
press [OK].
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PRS
7
TUV
8
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the OPTIONAL SETTING menu.
NOTE
•
The subaddress (and any spaces in it) must be exactly the same as the other
party’s subaddress.
•
•
To enter a space, press
If you enter a wrong number, use the cursor keys to go back to the digit you want to
correct ➞ press (Delete) ➞ enter the correct number.
To delete the entire entry, press (Clear).
(Space).
•
•
For details about sending and receiving documents with an ITU-T subaddress and
Setting Up Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-9
● If you want to select an international calling setting:
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <04 INTERNATIONAL>
F3
F4
➞
press [OK].
OK
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight a desired international long distance
setting press [OK].
➞
2
OK
The display returns to the OPTIONAL SETTING menu.
● If you want to select a transmission speed:
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <05 TX SPEED>
F3
F4
➞
press [OK].
OK
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight a desired transmission speed
➞
press
[OK].
OK
The display returns to the OPTIONAL SETTING menu.
● If you want to turn the Error Correction mode ON or OFF:
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <06 ECM>
➞
press [OK].
OK
Setting Up Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-10
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 ON> or <02 OFF>
➞
press [OK].
OK
The display returns to the OPTIONAL SETTING menu.
● If you want to select a telephone line for outgoing fax transmissions
(Only when the optional Canon Super G3 FAX Expansion Kit-B1 is
installed):
2
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <07 TX LENE SELECTION>
➞
press
[OK].
OK
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 AUTO> or <02 FIXED>
➞
press
[OK].
<01 AUTO>:The machine uses the available telephone line for outgoing fax
transmissions.
OK
<02 FIXED>:The machine uses only the line you selected for outgoing fax
transmissions.
The display returns to the OPTIONAL SETTING menu.
F3
F4
❑ If you selected <02 FIXED>, press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 LINE 1>
or <02 LINE 2>
➞
press [OK].
OK
The display returns to the OPTIONAL SETTING menu.
Setting Up Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-11
● If you want to select a sender name:
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <08 SENDER NAME>
➞
press [OK].
OK
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight a desired sender’s name from the list
➞
press [OK].
2
OK
The display returns to the TEL# REGISTRATION menu.
This completes all the optional settings for a one-touch speed dialing key.
Reset
13 When you are finished registering numbers for one-touch
speed dialing, press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic
Features screen.
Coded Speed Dialing
You can register up to 137 numbers for coded speed dialing. Each speed dialing
key can contain a telephone number up to 120 digits, and a name up to 16
characters.
If you register multiple destinations to a coded speed dialing key, the key for code
can be used for group dialing.
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions].
The ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <04 ADD.
REGISTRATION> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
Setting Up Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-12
The ADD. REGISTRATION menu appears.
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 CODED SPD DIAL>
➞ press [OK].
2
OK
The display for registering a coded speed dialing key appears.
NOTE
If the optional network board is installed, <02 E-MAIL ADDRESS> and <03 FTP
SERVER> are also displayed.
F3
F4
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 TEL#
REGISTRATION> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The TEL# REGISTRATION menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight an empty number under
which you want to register a fax number ➞ press [OK].
An empty coded speed dialing key displays <NOT REGISTERED> next to the
speed dialing number.
OK
The names or fax numbers already registered are displayed to the right of the
speed dialing numbers.
Setting Up Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-13
IMPORTANT
You cannot register fax numbers for speed dialing numbers designated to the
program one-touch key.
F3
F4
6
7
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 TEL NUMBER
ENTRY> ➞ press [OK].
OK
2
The display for entering the fax number appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Use the numeric keys to enter the fax number (up to 120 digits
including spaces) ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The message <DATA ENTRY OK> appears on the screen for about two seconds,
and the display returns to the TEL# REGISTRATION menu.
NOTE
•
•
To delete the fax number, press
If you entered a wrong number, use the cursor keys to go back to the position you
want to correct ➞ press (Delete) ➞ enter the correct number.
(Clear).
F3
F4
8
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 NAME> ➞ press
[OK].
OK
The display for entering the destination name appears.
Setting Up Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-14
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
9
Enter the name of the destination (up to 16 characters) ➞
press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The message <DATA ENTRY OK> appears on the screen for about two seconds,
the name of the destination is registered, and the display returns to the TEL#
REGISTRATION menu.
2
NOTE
For details about entering letters, see Chapter 2, “Basic Operations,” in the
Reference Guide.
F3
F4
10 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 OPTIONAL
SETTING> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The OPTIONAL SETTING menu appears.
F3
F4
11 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 OFF> or <02 ON> ➞
press [OK]
OK
If you selected <01 OFF>, the display returns to the TEL# REGISTRATION menu.
To continue registering other numbers, repeat the procedure from step 5.
If you selected <02 ON>, the OPTIONAL SETTING menu appears. Proceed to
the next step.
NOTE
From the OPTIONAL SETTING menu, you can set transmission features, such as
the access code, TX start time, ITU-T subaddress and password, international
sending, transmission speed, and ECM transmission.
Setting Up Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-15
F3
F4
12 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to set the desired optional setting ➞
press [OK].
OK
The display for setting the item you selected appears. The optional settings
include the following items:
2
Item
Description
Registers an access code from two to five digits to
ACCESS CODE
Preset a time to send documents stored in memory
automatically.
TX TIME SETTING
TX TYPE
Designates the transactions as transmissions to a
confidential mailbox, part of a relay broadcast, or an
answer to a polling request.You can also set the ITU-T
subaddress and password for each feature.
If you experience transmission errors during
international sending, change the international setting
to <INTERNATIONAL 1> and try to send the document
again. If the problem persists, select <INTERNATONAL
2>. If you still encounter a transmission error, select
<INTERNATIONAL 3>.
INTERNATIONAL
If transmission errors occur frequently while sending in
33.6 Kbps, select a slower speed: 14.4 Kbps, 9.6 Kbps,
4.8 Kbps, or 2.4 Kbps.
TX SPEED
ECM TX
ECM (Error Correction Mode) reduces system and line
errors during sending or receiving with another fax
machine that supports ECM.
If the optional Canon Super G3 FAX Expansion Kit-B1
TX LINE SELECTION is installed, you can set either telephone line for
outgoing fax transmissions.
Sets the sender’s name to appear on the documents
the other party receives.
SENDER NAME
Setting Up Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-16
● If you want to set an access code:
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 ACCESS CODE>
➞
press [OK].
OK
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
❑ Use the numeric keys to enter an access code (two to five digits)
➞
press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PRS
7
TUV
8
WXY
9
2
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the OPTIONAL SETTING menu.
NOTE
● If you want to select a preset time for the machine to automatically
send your documents:
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 TX TIME SETTING>
➞
press [OK].
OK
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight a preset time number (01 to 05)
➞
press
[OK].
You can set up to five times each day for the machine to automatically send
your documents.
OK
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
❑ Enter the time you want to start the transmission in 24-hour notation (e.g. 1:00
p.m. as 13:00) using the numeric keys
➞
press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PRS
7
TUV
8
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
Setting Up Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-17
The message <DATA ENTRY OK> appears on the screen for about two
seconds, and the display returns to the TX TIME SETTING menu.
NOTE
•
•
If you want to cancel the time or set other optional settings, press
(BACK).
If you made a mistake entering the time, use the cursor keys to go back to the digit
you want to correct ➞ enter the correct digit.
•
To delete the entire entry, press
(Clear).
● If you want to select the transmission type:
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 TX TYPE>
2
F3
F4
➞
press [OK].
<01 REGULAR TX>: Sends a document to the registered fax number, without
using a subaddress or password.
OK
<02 CONFIDENTIAL TX>: Sends a document to the registered fax number
using the confidential mailbox feature.
<03 ORIG RELAY TX>: Sends a document to the registered fax number for a
relay broadcast.
<04 SUBADDRESS TX>: Sends a document with an ITU-T subaddress and/or
password to the registered fax number.
<05 POLLING RX>: Sends a polling request to the registered fax number that
holds the document you would like to receive.
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight a transmission type
➞
press [OK].
OK
F3
F4
❑ Set the ITU-T subaddress and password for the TX TYPE setting you select.
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to select <01 PASSWORD> or <02 SUBADDRESS>
➞
enter the subaddress or password using the numeric keys
➞
press [OK].
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PRS
7
TUV
8
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the OPTIONAL SETTING menu.
Setting Up Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-18
NOTE
•
The subaddress (and any spaces in it) must be exactly the same as the other
party’s subaddress.
•
•
To enter a space, press
If you enter a wrong number, use the cursor keys to go back to the digit you want to
correct ➞ press (Delete) ➞ enter the correct number.
To delete the entire entry, press (Clear).
(Space).
•
•
For details about sending and receiving documents with an ITU-T subaddress and
2
● If you want to select an international calling setting:
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <04 INTERNATIONAL>
F3
F4
➞
press [OK].
OK
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight a desired international long distance
setting press [OK].
➞
OK
The display returns to the OPTIONAL SETTING menu.
● If you want to select a transmission speed:
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <05 TX SPEED>
F3
F4
➞
press [OK].
OK
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight a desired transmission speed
➞
press
[OK].
OK
The display returns to the OPTIONAL SETTING menu.
Setting Up Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-19
● If you want to turn the Error Correction mode ON or OFF:
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <06 ECM>
F3
F4
➞
press [OK].
OK
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 ON> or <02 OFF>
➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
2
OK
The display returns to the OPTIONAL SETTING menu.
● If you want to select a telephone line for outgoing fax transmissions
(Only when the optional Canon Super G3 FAX Expansion Kit-B1 is
installed):
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <07 TX LENE SELECTION>
➞
press
[OK].
OK
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 AUTO> or <02 FIXED>
➞
press
[OK].
<01 AUTO>:The machine uses the available telephone line for outgoing fax
transmissions.
OK
<02 FIXED>:The machine uses only the line you selected for outgoing fax
transmissions.
The display returns to the OPTIONAL SETTING menu.
F3
F4
❑ If you selected <02 FIXED>, press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 LINE 1>
or <02 LINE 2>
➞
press [OK].
OK
Setting Up Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-20
The display returns to the OPTIONAL SETTING menu.
● If you want to select a sender name:
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <08 SENDER NAME>
➞
press [OK].
2
OK
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight a desired sender’s name from the list
➞
press [OK].
OK
The display returns to the TEL# REGISTRATION menu.
This completes all the optional settings for a coded speed dialing key.
Reset
13 When you are finished registering numbers for coded speed
dialing, press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features
screen.
Group Dialing
Group dialing enables you to dial a group of registered one-touch or coded speed
dialing fax numbers. By registering a group for one-touch/coded speed dialing, you
press only one key or press [Coded Dial], followed by a three-digit code to send the
same document to several destination.
Each group can contain up to 199 destinations registered for one-touch or coded
speed dialing.
You can also preset the time to send documents using group dialing.
Setting Up Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-21
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions].
The ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <04 ADD
REGISTRATION> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
2
F3
F4
3
4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 GROUP DIAL> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The GROUP DIAL menu appears.
Create a group dial.
● To create a group under a one-touch speed dialing key:
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight an empty number
➞
press [OK].
An empty group dial number displays <NOT REGISTERED> next to the speed
dialing number.
OK
The names or fax numbers already registered are displayed to the right of the
speed dialing numbers.
If a group is already registered, <GROUP DIAL> is displayed for the number
registered as group dialing key.
The display for registering a group appears.
Setting Up Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-22
● To create a group under a coded speed dialing code:
❑ Press [Coded Dial].
Coded
Dial
An empty group dial number displays <NOT REGISTERED> next to the
speed dialing number.
The names or fax numbers already registered are displayed to the right of the
speed dialing numbers.
2
If a group is already registered, <GROUP DIAL> is displayed for the number
registered as group dialing key.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
❑ Use the numeric keys to enter the three-digit code under which you want to
create a group ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PRS
7
TUV
8
WXY
9
The display for registering a group appears.
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
IMPORTANT
OK
•
•
You cannot select one-touch speed dialing keys or coded speed dialing codes
under which fax numbers are already registered.
You cannot select one-touch speed dialing keys that are registered for program
one-touch keys.
F3
5
6
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 DESTINATION TEL/
ID> ➞ press [OK].
F4
OK
The display for specifying the destination appears.
Enter the destination using one-touch or coded speed dialing.
The names registered for one-touch or coded speed dialing are displayed.
Setting Up Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-23
OK
7
Repeat step 6 until you finish entering all the numbers you
want to include in the group ➞ press [OK].
The display returns to the GROUP DIAL menu to continue registering the group.
NOTE
2
To delete the number you just registered, press
(Clear).
F3
F4
8
9
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 NAME> ➞ press
[OK].
OK
The display for entering the group name appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Use the numeric keys to enter a name (up to 16 characters) for
the group ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The message <DATA ENTRY OK> appears on the screen for about two seconds,
the name is registered, and the display returns to the GROUP DIAL menu to
continue registering the group.
NOTE
For details about entering letters, see Chapter 2, “Basic Operations,” in the
Reference Guide.
Setting Up Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-24
F3
F4
10 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 OPTIONAL
SETTING> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The OPTIONAL SETTING menu appears.
2
F3
F4
11 If you want to set optional settings for your group, press [F3]
(▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 ON> ➞ press [OK].
If you do not want to perform optional settings, highlight <01 OFF> ➞ press
(OK). The display returns to the GROUP DIAL menu to continue
registering the group.
OK
If you want to continue registering other groups, repeat the above procedure
from step 4.
The OPTIONAL SETTING menu appears.
F3
F4
12 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to set the desired optional setting ➞
press [OK].
OK
● If you want to set an access code:
F3
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 ACCESS CODE> ➞ press [OK].
F4
OK
Setting Up Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-25
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
❑ Use the numeric keys to enter an access code (two to five digits) ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PRS
7
TUV
8
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the OPTIONAL SETTING menu.
NOTE
2
● If you want to set a press time for the machine to automatically send
your documents:
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 TX TIME SETTING> ➞ press [OK].
OK
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight a preset time number (01 to 05) ➞ press
[OK].
OK
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
❑ Enter the time you want to start the transmission in 24-hour notation (e.g.1: 00
p.m. as 13:00) using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PRS
7
TUV
8
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The message <DATA ENTRY OK> appears on the screen for about two
seconds and the display returns to the TX TIME SETTING menu.
This completes all the optional settings for a group dial.
NOTE
•
•
If you want to cancel setting the time, press
(BACK).
If you made a mistake entering the time, use the cursor keys to go back to the digit
you want to correct ➞ enter the correct digit.
•
To delete the entire entry, press
(Clear).
Setting Up Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-26
Reset
13 Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Access Code Dialing
Follow the procedure below to assign an access code of two to five digits to
represent a fax number.
You can assign the access code to
(#) or any one-touch speed dialing key.
2
NOTE
The default setting is ‘02 DO NOT USE’.
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions].
The ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <07 SYSTEM
SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
If a System Administrator ID and password are set, enter them after selecting
<07 SYSTEM SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
OK
For information on entering or setting the System Administrator ID and password,
see Chapter 6, “System Manager Settings,” in the Reference Guide.
The SYSTEM SETTINGS menu appears.
Setting Up Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-27
F3
F4
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <05 ACCESS CODE> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The ACCESS CODE menu appears.
2
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 USE> or <02 DO
NOT USE> ➞ press [OK].
If you selected <01 USE>, proceed to step 6.
OK
If you selected <02 DO NOT USE>, the setting is complete.
F3
F4
6
7
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 ACCESS CODE
KEY> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The ACCESS CODE KEY menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 USING # KEY> or
<02 OTHER> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The display returns to the ACCESS CODE menu.
Setting Up Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-28
NOTE
•
•
If you selected <01 USING # KEY>, you can assign the access code to
(#).
If you selected <02 OTHER>, you can assign the access code to any
F3
F4
8
9
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 NO OF
CHARACTERS> ➞ press [OK].
OK
2
The NO OF CHARACTERS menu appears.
F2
F3
Press [F2] (-) or [F3] (+) to enter the number of characters for
the access code ➞ press [OK].
OK
The display returns to the SYSTEM SETTINGS menu.
IMPORTANT
If access codes are already registered for one-touch or coded speed dialing, the
message <THE ACCESS CODE IS ALREADY SET CHANGE THE SETTING
AFTER CLEARING> appears on the screen for about two seconds.You cannot
change the number of characters. Delete the access codes first, then change the
number of characters.
NOTE
•
•
The access code can be two to five characters long.
You can also use numeric keys to enter the number of characters for the access
code.
Reset
10 Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Setting Up Speed Dialing
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Speed Dialing
Follow the procedures in this section to use speed dialing. The four speed dialing
methods are one-touch dialing, coded speed dialing, group dialing, and access
code dialing. If you forget where a number is registered, you can find it and dial it
2
One-Touch Speed Dialing
Follow this procedure to start a transmission and send a document with the press of
a one-touch speed dialing key.
You can register up to 63 destinations for one-touch speed dialing.
IMPORTANT
To use this feature, you must first register a telephone number for one-touch speed
1
2
Press [FAX].
FAX
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
Place your documents on the machine.
NOTE
•
•
You can also specify a sender’s name with
(TTI Selector). (See “Sending a
Using Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-30
3
Open the appropriate one-touch speed dialing panel ➞ press
the desired one-touch speed dialing key. If you do not see the
number of the key you want, open the first or second one-
touch speed dialing panel to see more keys.
01
63
2
The registered number and name of the key are displayed.
After five seconds (10 seconds for sequential broadcasting), the machine starts to
scan and send the document automatically.
NOTE
•
•
•
Close all one-touch speed dialing panels to access keys 01 to 21. Open the first
panel to access keys 22 to 42, and the second panel to access keys 43 to 63.
C
If you press the wrong one-touch speed dialing key, press
correct one-touch speed dialing key.
(Clear) ➞ press the
If you have preset a time to send documents to the number registered under the
one-touch speed dialing key, the machine will send the documents at the preset
time.
•
If you want to cancel the transmission after you press a one-touch speed dialing
key, press
(Stop).
Start
4
Press [Start] to scan your documents immediately.
Otherwise, the machine waits for five seconds before it starts to scan. This
Scanning starts.
Coded Speed Dialing
Follow this procedure to start a transmission and send a document by pressing
[Coded Dial], followed by a three-digit code.
You can register up to 137 destinations for coded speed dialing.
IMPORTANT
Using Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-31
1
2
Press [FAX].
FAX
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
Place your documents on the machine.
2
NOTE
•
•
You can also specify a sender’s name with
(TTI Selector). (See “Sending a
Coded
Dial
3
4
Press [Coded Dial].
<CODEDDIAL> is displayed.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Enter the three-digit code assigned to the number you want to
dial using the numeric keys.
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
The registered number and name are displayed.
After five seconds (10 seconds for sequential broadcasting), the machine starts to
scan and send the document automatically.
NOTE
•
•
•
If you enter the wrong code, press
correct code.
(Clear) ➞
(Coded Dial) ➞ enter the
C
If you have preset a time to send documents to the number registered under the
coded speed dialing code, the machine will send the documents at the preset time.
If you want to cancel the transmission after you enter the coded speed dialing
code, press
(Stop).
Using Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-32
0
Start
5
Press [Start] to scan your documents immediately.
Otherwise, the machine waits five seconds before it starts to scan. This timeout
Scanning starts.
Group Dialing
Follow this procedure to start a transmission and send a document to several
destinations with a one-touch or coded speed dialing number registered for group
dialing.
2
You can create a group of up to 199 destinations registered for one-touch or coded
speed dialing.
IMPORTANT
To use this feature, you must first register a group of telephone numbers for one-touch or
1
2
Press [FAX].
FAX
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
Place your documents on the machine.
NOTE
•
•
You can also specify a sender’s name with
(TTI Selector). (See “Sending a
01
63
3
Press the one-touch speed dialing key, or [Coded Dial]
followed by the three-digit code, where the group of telephone
numbers you want to dial is registered.
Coded
Dial
Using Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-33
The registered group name is displayed.
After 10 seconds, the machine starts to scan and send the document
automatically.
NOTE
•
•
•
If you press the wrong one-touch speed dialing key or enter the wrong coded
speed dialing code for the group, press (Clear) ➞ select the correct group.
If you have preset a time to send documents to the numbers registered in the
group, the machine will start to send the documents at the preset time.
If you want to cancel the transmission after you press a one-touch speed dialing
C
key or enter a speed dialing code, press
(Stop).
2
Start
4
Press [Start] to scan your documents immediately.
Otherwise, the machine waits 10 seconds before it starts to scan. This timeout
Scanning starts.
Directory Dialing
Follow this procedure to look up the other party’s name and retrieve the number for
dialing. This feature is convenient when you know the other party’s name, but
cannot recall the one-touch speed dialing key, the code for coded speed dialing, or
group dialing where the number is registered.
IMPORTANT
To use this feature, you must first register a name for one-touch, coded, or group dialing.
1
2
Press [FAX].
FAX
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
Place your documents on the machine.
NOTE
•
•
You can also specify a sender’s name with
(TTI Selector). (See “Sending a
Using Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-34
Directory
3
4
Press [Directory].
The search screen for Directory Dialing appears.
The search screen for directory dialing appears.
2
@.
ABC
2
DEF
1
GHI
4
3
MNO
6
Press the numeric key which corresponds to the first letter of
the name of the destination you are searching for ➞ press
[OK].
JKL
5
PRS
TUV
8
WXY
7
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
JKL
0
For example, if you press
5
(JKL), the first name and number registered for
this key’s letter group are displayed.
OK
NOTE
•
If you pressed the wrong key, press
C
(Clear) ➞ press the correct key that
corresponds to the first letter of the name you are searching for.
•
If the name is not registered correctly, the machine will not be able to find it.
F2
F3
5
Press [F2] (▼) or [F3] (▲) to highlight the destination you want
to dial ➞ press [OK].
OK
The selected number and name are displayed.
After five seconds (10 seconds for sequential broadcasting), the machine starts to
scan and send the document automatically.
NOTE
•
If you have preset a time to send documents to the numbers registered under the
one-touch speed dialing key or coded speed dialing code, the machine will send
the documents at the preset time.
•
If you want to cancel the transmission, press
(Stop).
Using Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-35
Start
6
Press [Start] to scan your documents immediately.
Otherwise, the machine waits five seconds before it starts to scan. This timeout
Scanning starts.
Access Code Dialing
Follow this procedure to use access code dialing.
2
You must register an access code when registering a number for one-touch or
IMPORTANT
1
2
Press [FAX].
FAX
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
Place your documents on the machine.
NOTE
•
•
You can also specify a sender’s name with
(TTI Selector). (See “Sending a
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
3
Press the access code key you have set using the numeric
keys.
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
If you have set
(#) as the access code key, press
(#).
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
Using Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-36
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
4
5
Enter the access code (two to five digits) using the numeric
keys.
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
The number and name of the destination are displayed.
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
Start
Press [Start].
Scanning starts.
2
Using Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-37
2
Using Speed Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-38
Basic Sending
3
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the fundamental procedures for dialing and sending documents.
Flow of Fax Sending Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Placing Originals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Adjusting the Resolution, Density, and Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Sending a Document with a Sender Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Document Stamp Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Turning ON/OFF the Stamp Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19
Sending Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Book Sending. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Memory Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Using Regular Dialing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
Redialing When the Line Is Busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Canceling Send Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Canceling Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Checking Transaction Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Flow of Fax Sending Operations
This section describes the flow of basic fax sending operations.
NOTE
For the following items:
- Main power and the Energy Saver mode, see Chapter 1, “Before You Start Using this
Machine,” in the Reference Guide.
- Routine maintenance, see Chapter 7, “Routine Maintenance,” in the Reference Guide.
3
1
Press [FAX].
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
FAX
● If the message <INSERT A CONTROL CARD> appears:
❑ Insert a control card.
NOTE
For instructions on using the optional Card Reader-E1, see Chapter 3, “Optional
Equipment,” in the Reference Guide.
Flow of Fax Sending Operations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2
● If the message <ENTER DEPARTMENT ID AND PASSWORD>
appears:
❑ Enter the Department ID and password ➞ press [ID].
ID
The FAX Basic Features screen appears.
3
NOTE
For instructions on using Department ID Management, see Chapter 6, “System
Manager Settings,” in the Reference Guide.
2
Place your original.
You can place your original either vertically or horizontally in the feeder or on the
platen glass.
3
Select the desired fax settings on the Fax Basic Features
screen.
Flow of Fax Sending Operations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-3
NOTE
•
On the Fax Basic Features screen, you can adjust the scan settings, such as the
Resolution, Density, and Image Quality.You can also select the sheet size for Book
Sending.
•
4
5
Select the desired fax sending modes.
❑ Open all three one-touch speed dialing panels.
❑ Press a Fax function key or a program one-touch key ➞ select their settings ➞
press [OK].
3
NOTE
Specify the destination.
If you want to set other sending conditions, set them before you specify the
Start
6
Press [Start].
Scanning starts.
IMPORTANT
The size of the original is detected automatically. However, if the output paper in
the machine at the receiving end does not match the size of your scanned
document, the machine reduces the size of your document, or separates it into
several pages to match the paper size loaded in the recipient’s fax machine.
NOTE
•
If prior jobs are being processed, the machine returns to the Fax Basic Features
screen, and your document will be sent once the jobs are complete.
•
The machine usually sends documents through memory transmission (sends an
image after storing it in memory).You can also send documents one by one, by
pressing
Flow of Fax Sending Operations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-4
•
•
The machine has enough memory (16 MB) to store up to 100 pages* of sent and
received documents (fewer if the document contains many graphics or particularly
dense text). If you have the optional memory module installed, you can store up to
1500 pages*. *These figures are based on the use of ITU-T No.1 chart, using the
standard settings.
If the memory becomes full while you are scanning a document for sending, the
message <MEMORY FULL> appears on the LCD display. Press
(OK) so
that the paper remaining in the feeder can be put out. All the pages you were
scanning will be cancelled.
•
•
The number of pages you can store into memory differs depending on the amount
of free memory remaining in the machine and the type of document you are
scanning.
Press
(Monitor) to check the transmission result, or cancel sending the
3
Stop
7
8
9
If you want to cancel sending the document, press [Stop].
When scanning is complete, remove your original.
If the optional Card Reader-E1 is attached, remove the control
card.
For instructions on using the optional Card Reader-E1, see Chapter 3, “Optional
Equipment,” in the Reference Guide.
10 If you have set Department ID Management, press [ID].
ID
For instructions on using Department ID Management, see Chapter 6, “System
Manager Settings,” in the Reference Guide.
Flow of Fax Sending Operations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-5
Placing Originals
Place your originals on the platen glass or in the feeder, depending on the size and
type of paper that you want to fax, and the settings that you have specified.
■ Platen Glass
Place the originals on the platen glass when scanning bound originals, originals on heavy
or lightweight paper, and transparencies.
3
■ Feeder
Place a stack of originals in the feeder ➞ press [Start]. The machine automatically scans
them into memory.
NOTE
•
•
The size of the original is automatically detected, and the document is scanned.
However, if the output paper in the machine at the receiving end is not equal to the
scanned size, the original image is either reduced in size to match the size of the output
paper at the receiving end, or is divided into parts before being sent.
The machine cannot always detect the size of the original if it is a nonstandard size or
object, such as a book. In this case, specify the size at which you want to scan the
original. (See Chapter 2, “Basic Copying Features,” in the Copying Guide.)
Placing Originals
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-6
Orientation
You can place an original either vertically or horizontally. Always align the top edge
of your original with the back edge of the platen glass (by the arrow in the top left
corner), or with the back edge of the feeder.
Platen Glass
TX Terminal ID
Printed Here
TX Terminal
ID Printed
Here
Place the
original
face down.
3
Place the original face down.
Vertical Placement
Horizontal Placement
Feeder
TX Terminal ID
TX Terminal ID
Printed Here
Printed Here
ABC
ABC
Place the
original
face up.
Place the
original
face up.
Vertical Placement
IMPORTANT
Horizontal Placement
•
If the top edge of the original is not aligned with the back edge of the platen glass (by the arrow
in the top left corner), prints may not be made correctly, depending on the mode you have set.
•
If an original is scanned facing the wrong direction, the sender information is not printed
in the correct position on the fax.
NOTE
• LTR originals can be placed either vertically or horizontally. However, the scanning speed
for horizontally placed originals is somewhat slower than for vertically placed originals.
• Horizontally placed LTR originals are referred to as LTR
• 11" x 17" and LGL originals must be placed horizontally.
.
• To get the same output result when you are using the feeder as when the original is
placed on the platen glass, place the original upside-down and face up in the feeder.
However, when using the Staple mode, the finisher rotates the output automatically.
Placing Originals
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Platen Glass
You should use the platen glass when scanning bound originals (such as books
and magazines), originals on heavy or lightweight paper, and transparencies into
memory.
1
Lift up the feeder.
3
IMPORTANT
This machine is equipped with an open/close sensor on the underside of the feeder
(see circled area in the above illustration). When placing originals on the platen
glass, lift the feeder above 11 7/8" (30 cm) so that the sensor detaches from the
underside of the feeder. If the sensor does not detach from the underside of the
feeder, the size of the originals may not be detected correctly.
2
Place your original face down.
The surface that you want to scan into memory must be placed face down. Align
the top edge of your original with the back edge of the platen glass (by the arrow
in the top left corner).
Place books and other bound originals on the platen glass in the same way.
Placing Originals
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-8
If you are enlarging an STMT or LTR original to 11" x 17" or LGL paper, place the
original horizontally on the platen glass, and align it with the STMT
marks.
or LTR
3
Gently lower the feeder.
3
CAUTION
• Close the feeder gently, to avoid catching your hand, as this may result in
personal injury.
• Do not press down hard on the feeder when using the platen glass to make
copies of thick books. Doing so may damage the platen glass and result in
personal injury.
IMPORTANT
•
If you are placing originals on the platen glass, the size of the original is detected
after the feeder has been lowered. Be sure to lower the feeder before sending.
•
STMT originals and postcards cannot be detected. Follow the instructions on the
display and specify the original size or select the paper size.
NOTE
Remove the original from the platen glass when scanning is complete.
Placing Originals
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Feeder (ADF-J1)
Place a stack of originals in the feeder ➞ press [Start]. The machine automatically
scans them into memory.
You can place the following originals into the original supply tray:
• Weight: 10 to 32 lb bond (37 to 128 g/m2)
Place very thin originals (10 to 14 lb bond [37 to 51 g/m2]), or very thick
originals (28 to 32 lb bond [105 to 128 g/m2]) into the feeder one at a time.
• Size:
11'' x 17'' , LGL , LTR , or LTR
.
• Tray Capacity: 50 sheets (20 lb bond [80 g/m2])
25 sheets (11 lb bond [40 g/m2] or less)
3
IMPORTANT
• Do not place the following types of originals in the feeder:
- Originals with tears or large binding holes
- Severely curled originals or originals with sharp folds
- Clipped or stapled originals
- Carbon backed paper or other originals which might not feed smoothly
- Transparencies and other highly transparent originals
• Avoid scanning the same original using the feeder more than approximately 30 times.
Scanning the same original repeatedly may result in the original becoming folded or torn,
which in turn could cause a paper jam.
• If the feeder rollers are dirty from scanning an original written in pencil, perform the
feeder cleaning procedure. (See Chapter 7, “Routine Maintenance,” in the Reference
Guide.)
1
Neatly place your originals face up in the original supply tray.
Place your originals as far into the feeder as they will go.
A beep sounds when the originals are set correctly.
Placing Originals
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-10
2
Adjust the slide guides to fit the size of your originals.
C
O
P
Y
F
A
3
IMPORTANT
• Do not add or remove originals while they are being scanned.
• Do not place objects in the original output area. Blocking the paper delivery slot
may damage the originals.
• When scanning is complete, remove the originals from the original output tray to
avoid paper jams.
Original Output Tray
C
O
P
Y
F
A
X
NOTE
The scanned originals are putout face down to the original output tray.
Placing Originals
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-11
Adjusting the Resolution, Density, and Image
Quality
Adjust the resolution, density, and image quality to send documents that are very
close to the quality of the original document.
NOTE
•
You can change the default setting for the resolution, density, and image quality. For
example, if you scan originals with a high density very often, you can preset the default
3
•
If you set the image quality to ‘TEXT/PHOTO’ or ‘PHOTO’ while the resolution is set to
‘SUPER FINE’ or ‘ULTRA FINE’, the resolution automatically changes to ‘FINE’.
However, you can set it again to ‘SUPER FINE’ or ‘ULTRA FINE’ by pressing the
resolution key again.
•
•
•
The scan settings resume their default settings once the transmission completes or the
Auto Clear Time has elapsed. (See Chapter 4, “Selecting and Storings Settings,” in the
Reference Guide.)
If you set the resolution to ‘FINE’, ‘SUPER FINE’, ‘ULTRA FINE’, or the image quality to
‘TEXT/PHOTO’ or ‘PHOTO’, the quality of the scanned image will be higher, but the
scanning and sending time will be longer.
The default settings are as follows:
- RESOLUTION: STANDARD
- DENSITY:
STANDARD
- IMAGEQUALITY: TEXT
■ Resolution
Adjusts the resolution for documents with fine text and thin lines. The higher the
resolution, the higher the quality of the output, but the slower the scanning speed.
ULTRA FINE: Eight times the STANDARD resolution (400 dpi x 400 dpi)
SUPER FINE: Four times the STANDARD resolution (200 dpi x 400 dpi)
FINE:
Twice the STANDARD resolution (200 dpi x 200 dpi)
STANDARD: For normal printed or typewritten text (200 dpi x 100 dpi)
NOTE
If the receiving party’s fax machine does not have the ‘SUPER FINE’ or ‘ULTRA FINE’
setting, and you send a document with one of these resolutions, the image the receiving
party receives reproduces at their machine’s maximum resolution setting.
Adjusting the Resolution, Density, and Image Quality
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Density
Adjusts the lightness/darkness of the document pages scanned for sending.
DARK:
STANDARD: For normal printed or typewritten text.
LIGHT: For documents with dark text or colors.
For documents with light text or colors.
■ Image Quality
3
Adjusts the image quality of documents containing text only or both text and photos on the
same page.
TEXT:
Select for sending a document that contains normal printed or typewritten
text.
TEXT/PHOTO: Select for sending a document that contains both text and halftone
images, such as photographs.
PHOTO:
Select for sending a document that contains halftone images only, such as
photographs.
1
2
Press [FAX].
FAX
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
Place you documents on the machine.
NOTE
•
•
You can also specify a sender’s name with
(TTI Selector). (See “Sending a
Adjusting the Resolution, Density, and Image Quality
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-13
F1
F2
F3
3
Press [F1] (RESOLUTION), [F2] (DENSITY), or
[F3] (IMAGEQUALITY).
F1
Press
(RESOLUTION) repeatedly to select the desired resolution
setting.
F2
F3
Press
(DENSITY) repeatedly to select the desired scanning density.
(IMAGEQUALITY) repeatedly to select the desired the image
Press
quality setting.
3
OK
4
5
After adjusting the scan settings, press [OK].
Specify the destination.
Start
6
Press [Start].
Scanning starts.
Adjusting the Resolution, Density, and Image Quality
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-14
Sending a Document with a Sender Name
Follow this procedure to select one of the registered sender names.
Sender names are selected by pressing [TTI Selector] under the three one-touch
speed dialing panels.
NOTE
•
This setting is optional. If you do not select a sender name before sending a document,
the registered unit’s name is printed at the top of the document in the sender information
3
•
If you select a sender’s name before you send a document, it replaces the unit’s name
printed in the sender information area, (See “Registering the Sender Information (TX
•
•
Up to 99 sender names can be registered. At least one sender’s name must be
If the TX TERMINAL ID is set to ‘02 OFF’, the sender’s name is not printed on the
document received by the other party even if you select a sender’s name when sending.
1
Place your documents on the machine.
NOTE
2
Open all three one-touch speed dialing panels ➞ press [TTI
Selector].
TTI Selector
The list of the sender names is displayed.
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight the desired sender’s
name ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
You can also enter the assigned number of the sender’s name using the numeric
keys.
Sending a Document with a Sender Name
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-15
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Start
4
Specify the destination ➞ press [Start].
3
The machine scans the document and sends it.
Sending a Document with a Sender Name
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-16
Document Stamp Feature
The Stamp Feature of your machine enables you to stamp the front, lower left
corner of every page you scan for sending using the feeder. This enables you to
check whether all pages of your document have been sent or scanned into
memory.
Setting the Stamp Feature
3
Follow the procedure below to select whether the machine stamps the documents
you scan for direct, and memory sending, or only documents you scan for direct
sending.
The documents are stamped when they are set on the feeder.
The stamp feature does not stamp documents you scan for sending using the
platen glass or documents you copy.
NOTE
•
•
The default setting is ‘01 DIRECT&MEMORY TX’.
Additional Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions].
The ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS menu appears.
F3
F4
2
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
Document Stamp Feature
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-17
F3
F4
3
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 TX SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The TX SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <06 STAMP ACTION> ➞
press [OK].
3
OK
The STAMP ACTION menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 DIRECT&MEMORY
TX> or <02 DIRECT TX> ➞ press [OK].
[DIIRECT&MEMORY TX]: This stamps documents after they are scanned for
Direct Sending or Memory Sending.
OK
[DIIRECTTX]: This stamps documents after they are sent, in the Direct
Transmission mode only.
The display returns to the TX SETTINGS menu.
Reset
6
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Document Stamp Feature
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-18
Turning ON/OFF the Stamp Feature
You can stamp every page you send or scan for sending using the stamp feature. If
you place the document horizontally in the feeder, the document is stamped at the
position shown in the illustration below.
Stamp
0
3
IMPORTANT
The stamp feature does not stamp documents you scan for sending using the platen
glass or copying.
NOTE
•
•
•
You can also turn the stamp feature ON/OFF using the Additional Functions menu.
You can select whether the machine stamps documents you scan for direct, and memory
Be careful, because no information is displayed about the stamp feature even if it is
turned ON.
1
Press [FAX].
FAX
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
2
Place your documents in the feeder.
3
Open all three one-touch speed dialing panels ➞ press
[Stamp].
Stamp
The TX STAMP menu is displayed.
Document Stamp Feature
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F3
F4
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 TX STAMP ON> ➞
press [OK].
OK
Specify the destination ➞ send the document.
The document is stamped ( ).
3
NOTE
If the stamp becomes faint you may have to refill the stamp ink compartment. (See
Chapter 7, “Routine Maintenance,” in the Reference Guide.)
Document Stamp Feature
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-20
Sending Methods
This section describes the methods and advantages of the three main sending
methods: Book Sending, Memory Sending, and Direct Sending.
■ Book Sending
The machine scans and sends documents that cannot be placed in the feeder, such as a
page of a book, torn paper, or a delicate document.
3
■ Memory Sending
The machine scans all pages into memory, and then sends them.
■ Direct Sending
The machine starts scanning the document and sends the document one page at a time
without storing the document into memory.
NOTE
If a paper jam occurs during scanning, the transmission is canceled. Perform the sending
procedure again.
Book Sending
Book Sending enables you to send a document that cannot be set in the feeder,
such as a page of a book, torn paper, or a delicate document.
1
2
Press [FAX].
FAX
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
Place your document face down on the platen glass.
NOTE
•
•
You can also specify a sender’s name with
(TTI Selector). (See “Sending a
Sending Methods
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-21
F4
3
4
Press [F4] (BOOK SENDING) to select the document size ➞
press [OK].
OK
F4
Each time you press
(▲), the next menu option becomes highlighted.
Specify the destination.
3
Start
5
6
Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning the document into memory.
OK
After scanning all the pages you want to send, press [OK].
The scanned pages are automatically sent from memory.
NOTE
•
A transaction number is assigned to every document scanned for sending. It is
used for canceling a transmission, or printing/deleting the documents in memory. A
page number shows the order of the pages in one document. (See “Canceling
•
•
To cancel sending, press
If the memory becomes full while you are scanning a document for sending, the
message <MEMORY FULL> appears on the LCD display. Press (OK) so
(Stop).
that the paper remaining in the feeder can be put out. All the pages you were
scanning are deleted.
•
•
The number of pages you can scan into memory differs depending on the amount
of free memory remaining in the machine, and the type of document you are
scanning.
The document is automatically deleted from memory if the transmission is
successful.
Sending Methods
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-22
•
If an error occurs during sending, the document is automatically erased from
memory, even if it is not sent completely.You can also prevent the machine from
deleting the document of a failed transmission. (See “Automatic Document
•
•
If you cannot send a document, check to see that the fax number of the other party
is correct, and try sending again.
Once the document is scanned into memory, you can make copies even while the
unit is sending the document. Press
(COPY) to switch to the copy mode.
COPY
Memory Sending
Memory Sending enables you to scan and send your documents fast, allowing you
to get your documents back quickly so you do not have to spend so much time
standing around the machine.You can start scanning documents for sending even
while the machine is busy sending another document.
3
Memory Sending is automatically selected unless you select Direct Sending.
NOTE
•
•
The machine has enough memory (16 MB) to store up to 100 pages* of sent and
received documents (fewer if the document contains many graphics or particularly dense
text). If you have the optional memory module installed, you can store up to 1500 pages*.
*These figures are based on the use of ITU-T No.1 chart, using the standard settings.
If the memory becomes full, delete the documents you do not need from the memory.
1
Press [FAX].
FAX
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
2
Place your documents on the machine.
NOTE
•
•
You can also specify a sender’s name with
(TTI Selector). (See “Sending a
Sending Methods
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-23
3
4
Specify the destination.
Start
Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning the first page into memory.
The document is stored in the memory, and will be sent automatically.
3
NOTE
•
A transaction number is assigned to every document scanned for sending, It is
used for canceling a transmission, or printing/deleting the documents in memory. A
page number shows the order of the pages in one document. (See “Canceling
•
•
To cancel sending, press
If the memory becomes full while you are scanning a document for sending, the
message <MEMORY FULL> appears on the LCD display. Press (OK) so
(Stop).
that the paper remaining in the feeder can be put out. All the pages you were
scanning are deleted.
•
The number of pages you can scan into memory differs depending on the amount
of free memory remaining in the machine, and the type of document you are
scanning.
•
•
The document is automatically deleted from memory if the transmission was
successful.
If an error occurs during sending, the document is automatically erased from
memory, even if it is not sent completely.You can also prevent the machine from
deleting the document of a failed transmission. (See “Automatic Document
•
•
If you cannot send a document, check to see that the fax number of the other party
is correct, and try sending again.
Once the document is scanned into memory, you can make copies even while the
unit is sending the document. Press
(COPY) to switch to the copy mode.
COPY
Sending Methods
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-24
Direct Sending
If you send a document using Direct Sending, the machine dials the number,
connects the call, and then scans and sends the document one page at a time.
Direct Sending is slower than Memory Sending but because this method bypass
the memory, you can send a document ahead of other documents stored in
memory.
IMPORTANT
You must place your documents in the feeder in order to use the Direct Sending method.
You cannot select Direct Sending for a document placed on the platen glass.
NOTE
3
•
•
•
Direct Sending scans and sends each page one at a time.
With Direct Sending, you can watch each page as it is scanned and sent.
Although Direct Sending is slower that Memory Sending, you can use Direct Sending if
you nee to send an urgent document ahead of other documents stored in memory.
•
You can also use Direct Sending when the memory is full and there is no space to hold
another document in memory.
1
Press [FAX].
FAX
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
2
Place your documents in the feeder.
NOTE
•
•
You can also specify a sender’s name with
(TTI Selector). (See “Sending a
Direct TX
3
Press [Direct TX].
The Direct TX indicator lights. The machine is now in the Direct Sending mode.
NOTE
To cancel Direct Sending, press
(Direct TX) again.
Sending Methods
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-25
4
5
Specify the destination.
IMPORTANT
•
If you are sending the same document to more than one location, and the
document is scanned into memory, sequential broadcasting is automatically
selected even if you have selected Direct Sending. (See “Sequential Broadcasting
3
•
If you have selected delayed transmission or sequential broadcasting, memory
sending is automatically selected.
Start
Press [Start].
The machine dials the other party’s number, and starts sending the document.
Each page is sent as it is scanned.
NOTE
•
During transmission, a series of messages appear on the LCD display, and report
the other party’s telephone number, transaction number, and the number of pages.
The final message reports that the transmission was successful.
•
•
To stop sending, press
With Direct Sending, the machine scans one page into memory at once and sends
it right away. Therefore, when <MEMORY FULL> is displayed even if you have
selected direct sending, wait until there is enough space in the memory to scan
Sending Methods
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-26
Using Regular Dialing
When you come to a step that requires dialing a number, you can dial the number
by pressing the numeric keys on the control panel, just like you would when dialing
a telephone number. This is called “Regular Dialing.”
NOTE
To make dialing easier, register frequently used numbers to the one-touch speed dialing
3
1
2
Press [FAX].
FAX
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
Place your documents on the machine.
NOTE
•
•
You can also specify a sender’s name with
(TTI Selector). (See “Sending a
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
3
Dial the other party’s fax number using the numeric keys.
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
The number you enter appears on the display.
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
NOTE
•
If you need to call long distance or overseas, press
pauses.
(Pause/Redial) to insert
•
For example, you can insert a pause after the telephone company code, country
code, or the fax number. A “p” is displayed between two numbers, and “P” is
Using Regular Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-27
•
If you need to temporarily switch to tone dialing when your machine is connected to
a rotary pulse line, press
•
•
If you need to enter a subaddress, you can use
If you make a mistake during dialing, open all three one-touch speed dialing panels
➞ press (Clear) to clear the entire entry ➞ enter the correct telephone
or
number.You can also use
telephone number.
(Clear) on the control panel to clear the entire
C
•
If you make a mistake during dialing and you do not want to clear the entire
telephone numbers, use the cursor keys to go back to the digit you want to correct,
open all three one-touch speed dialing panels ➞ press
incorrect digit ➞ enter the correct digit.
(Delete) to delete the
3
Start
4
Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning and sending the document.
Using Regular Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-28
Redialing When the Line Is Busy
If the other party’s line is busy or if there is no answer, the machine waits two
minutes, then tries to dial the same number again. This feature is called “Automatic
Redialing.”You can also manually redial the number by pressing [Pause/Redial] on
the control panel.
Automatic Redialing
3
After the initial dialing attempt, the machine dials the same number again after a
specified amount of time has elapsed.
If Auto Redial is set to ‘01 ON’, the number of redialing attempts and the time
interval between attempts can be set.
You can set up the following options for automatic redialing:
• The number of times the machine attempts to redial (default setting: ‘02 times’)
• The time interval the machine waits between redialing attempts (default setting:‘2
minutes’)
• How the machine handles redialing when a transmission error occurs (default
setting: ‘ERROR & 1ST PAGE’)
NOTE
The default Auto Redial setting is ‘01 ON’.
Additional Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
OK
Redialing When the Line Is Busy
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-29
F3
F4
2
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 TX SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The TX SETTINGS menu appears.
3
F3
F4
3
4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 AUTO REDIAL> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The AUTO REDIAL menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 ON> ➞ press [OK].
If you do not want to use the Auto Redial Feature, select <02 OFF> ➞ press
(OK). Proceed to step 6.
OK
The display for setting up the Auto Redial feature appears.
5
Adjust the auto redial settings to suit your needs.
● If you want to set the number of times the machine attempts to redial:
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 REDIAL TIMES> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
OK
Redialing When the Line Is Busy
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-30
The display for setting the number of redialing times appears.
❑ Press [F2] (–) or [F3] (+) to select the desired number of redialing attempts ➞
F2
F3
press [OK].
OK
The display returns to the AUTO REDIAL menu.
NOTE
•
•
You can set the machine to redial from 01 to 10 times.
You can also use the numeric keys to enter the number of redialing attempts.
3
● If you want to set the redial interval:
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 REDIAL INTERVAL> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
OK
The display for setting the redial interval appears.
❑ Press [F2] (–) or [F3] (+) to select the desired redial time interval ➞ press [OK].
F2
F3
OK
The display returns to the AUTO REDIAL menu.
NOTE
•
•
You can set the time interval from 02 to 99 minutes in one-minute increments.
You can also use the numeric keys to enter the redial time interval.
● If you want to resend a document after an error occurs:
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 TX ERROR RESEND> ➞ press
F3
F4
[OK].
OK
The TX ERROR RESEND menu appears.
Redialing When the Line Is Busy
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-31
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 ON> or <02 OFF> ➞ press [OK].
If you do not want to use the TX Error Resend function, select <02 OFF> ➞
F3
F4
press
(OK) ➞ proceed to step 6.
OK
If you selected <01 ON>, the RESEND TX FROM menu appears.
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 ALL PAGES>, <02 ERROR & 1ST
PAGE>, or <03 ERROR PAGE> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
ALL PAGES: Resends all pages of the document.
3
OK
ERROR & 1ST PAGE: Resends the document from the page where the error
occurred. It also resends the first page of the document.
ERROR PAGE: Resends the document from the page where the error
occurred.
The display returns to the TX SETTINGS menu.
Reset
6
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Checking Automatic Redialing
Monitor
F1
1
Press [Monitor] ➞ [F1] (TX/RX RESULT).
The following screen is displayed.
NOTE
F2
F4
•
If you do not want to send the document using automatic redialing, press
F3
(
▼
) or
(DELETE DOCMT).
If the message <OK TO DELETE?> appears on the display, press
(▲
) to select the transmission you want to cancel
➞
press
F3
•
(YES)
to cancel automatic redialing.The document will be deleted from memory.
Redialing When the Line Is Busy
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-32
● If you are sending a document using Direct Sending:
❑ The following display appears. When the machine is waiting to redial, be sure
to leave the document in the feeder.
NOTE
• To cancel redialing, press
If the TX Error Resend function is ON, the machine also redials when an error
occurs during sending.
(Stop). Redialing is canceled immediately.
•
3
•
If the machine does not manage to send the document, the machine waits for
another two minutes and dials again. If the transmission fails again, sending is
Manual Redialing
1
Press [FAX].
FAX
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
2
Place your documents on the machine.
NOTE
•
•
You can also specify a sender’s name with
(TTI Selector). (See “Sending a
Redialing When the Line Is Busy
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-33
Pause/
Redial
3
4
Press [Pause/Redial].
If you want to stop sending, press
(Stop).
The last dialed number is displayed, and the machine gets ready to send the
document.
Start
Press [Start].
3
Scanning starts.
Redialing When the Line Is Busy
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-34
Canceling Send Jobs
This section describes the procedure to cancel a transmission in progress.
Canceling Transmission
Follow the procedure below to cancel sending documents during a transmission.
You can also cancel a transmission that has been preset to transmit at a specified
time by deleting the document if you know its transaction number.
3
Stop
1
2
During transmission, press [Stop].
If you are using Direct Sending, an alarm sounds, and the transmission is
canceled immediately.
If you are using Memory Sending, the message <CANCEL DURING TX/RX?> is
displayed.
If you press
(Stop) while the machine is scanning a document placed in the
feeder or during Direct Sending, the message <STOP KEY PRESSED PRESS
OK KEY> is displayed.
F3
Press [F3] (YES).
If the machine is scanning the document, or sending the document using Direct
F4
Sending, press
(OK).
F3
After you press
(YES) to cancel the transmission, an alarm sounds, and a
Scanning or sending stops.
NOTE
F3
•
•
Sending is not canceled until you press
(YES).
If you cancel during Direct Sending, you may have to open the feeder cover to
remove your document.
Canceling Send Jobs
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Canceling Automatic Redialing or Memory Sending
Monitor
1
Press [Monitor].
If the copy job monitor screen is displayed, press
The fax job monitor screen is displayed.
(Monitor) again.
F1
2
Press [F1] (TX/RX RESULT).
The list of transmission results is displayed.
3
F2
F3
3
4
Press [F2] (▼) or [F3] (▲) to highlight the transmission you
want to cancel ➞ [F4] (DELETE DOCMT).
F3
F2
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous list item
OK
F3
Press [F3] (YES).
The document waiting for Automatic Redialing or Memory Sending is canceled.
NOTE
You can also cancel a transmission by pressing
(Memory Reference) and
pressing [F4] (DELETE DOCMT). (See “Deleting a Received Document from
Canceling Send Jobs
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-36
F3
F4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 DOC. MEMORY
LIST> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The document memory list is printed, and you can check the detailed information
about the documents waiting to be sent or the received documents.
3
Canceling Send Jobs
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-37
Checking Transaction Results
Follow the procedure below to check the detailed information about a sending job,
such as the document set time and number of pages. This feature is convenient
when you want to check the status of a transaction without printing an Activity
Management Report.You can also check which destinations are set for a
sequential broadcast.
3
Monitor
1
Press [Monitor].
If the copy job monitor screen is displayed, press
The fax job monitor screen is displayed.
(Monitor) again.
● To check the detailed information:
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to view the list of sending jobs ➞ select the desired
send job that you want to check ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
OK
The detailed information about the sending job you selected is displayed.
NOTE
F4
You can cancel the sending job by pressing
(CANCEL).
F1
2
Press [F1] (TX/RX RESULT).
The list of transmission results is displayed.
Checking Transaction Results
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-38
F1
3
4
Press [F1] (RX/TX STATUS).
The fax job monitor screen reappears.
Reset
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
3
Checking Transaction Results
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Checking Transaction Results
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-40
Additional Sending Features
4
CHAPTER
This chapter describes additional sending features.This chapter also shows you how to send a
document to more than one location, set a document for delay sending, and send document
with a subaddress and password.
Transmission Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Setting Up the ECM for Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Automatic Document Deletion after a Failed Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Sequential Broadcasting to More Than One Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Sending Documents at a Preset Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Setting a Delayed Transmission During a Sending Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
Checking and Canceling a Delayed Transmission Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Sending a Document with a Subaddress/Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
Setting Up and Using PIN Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Dialing with a PIN Code after a Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transmission Settings
This section explains how to set additional fax transmission functions.
Setting Up the ECM for Sending
ECM (Error Correction Mode) reduces the effect of system and line errors on
documents that occur during sending or receiving with another fax machine that
supports ECM. If the other machine does not support ECM, this setting is ignored.
If transmission speed appears extremely slow, you may be able to speed up
transmission time by turning ECM ‘02 OFF’.
4
IMPORTANT
• If you want to communicate using ECM, it is necessary take the ECM function be set in
both the destination machine and the sending machine.
• Even if you set ECM, errors can sometimes occur if the telephone line is in poor
condition.
• If there is trouble with the telephone line, transmissions take longer to complete.
NOTE
The default setting is ‘01 ON’.
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions].
The ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
Transmission Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-2
F3
F4
3
4
5
6
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 TX SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The TX SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 ECM TX> ➞ press
[OK].
OK
4
The ECM TX menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 ON> or <02 OFF> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The ECM is set, and the display returns to the TX SETTINGS menu.
Reset
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Transmission Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-3
Pause Time
This section describes how to set the pause time (in seconds).
Some overseas dialing may not be successful due to the distance or complex route
of connections when you dial the international access code, country code, and the
destination number all together. In such cases, insert a pause after the international
access code. The machine dials the number with a short waiting time where the
pause has been inserted, which helps improve the connection.
Follow this procedure to adjust the length of a pause entered within a dialed
number.
IMPORTANT
If your machine is connected to a switchboard or PBX (Private Branch Exchange), you
may have to dial a number to connect to an outside line. The outside number must also
be registered with the fax number. The switching system may also require that you insert
a pause after the outside number. For further assistance, contact an authorized Canon
dealer or your local telephone company.
4
NOTE
• Keep in mind the following important points about pauses:
- A pause entered within a number (p) is two seconds long.
- You can add consecutive pauses (pp) by pressing
(Pause/Redial).
- Each additional pause adds two seconds to the pause time.
- You can change the length of a pause entered within a number (see the procedure
below).
- A pause at the end of a number (P) is always 10 seconds long and cannot be adjusted.
• The default setting is ‘02SEC’.
Additional Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
OK
Transmission Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4
F3
F4
2
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 TX SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The TX SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 PAUSE TIME> ➞
press [OK].
4
OK
The display for setting the pause time appears.
F2
F3
4
Press [F2] (-) or [F3] (+) to increase or decrease the pause
time (in seconds) ➞ press [OK].
You can also enter the pause length using the numeric keys.
OK
The pause time is set, and the display returns to the TX SETTINGS menu.
NOTE
You can set the pause length between 01 and 15 seconds, in one-second
increments.
Reset
5
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Transmission Settings
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Document Deletion after a Failed Transmission
Follow the procedure below to set whether to delete a document after a
transmission error occurs.
NOTE
The default setting is ‘02 ON’.
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
4
OK
ç
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 TX SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The TX SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <04 ERASE FAILED TX>
➞ press [OK].
OK
The ERASE FAILED TX menu appears.
Transmission Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-6
F3
F4
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 OFF> or <02 ON> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The Erase Failed TX mode is set, and the display returns to the TX SETTINGS
menu.
Reset
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Time Out Mode
4
The timeout mode enables you to have the machine automatically start scanning
documents after specifying destinations using one-touch/coded speed dialing,
access code dialing, or redialing without pressing [Start].
If you turn the TIME OUT mode ‘01 ON’, the machine pauses for five seconds after
you specify a destination before starting to scan.
If you are using sequential broadcasting to send your document to more than one
location, you must dial the second number within five seconds of dialing the first
number. All subsequent numbers must be dialed within 10 seconds. If you wait
longer than the specified timeout interval before dialing the next number, the
machine starts to scan your document.
NOTE
The default setting is ‘01 ON’.
Additional Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
OK
Transmission Settings
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ç
F3
F4
2
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 TX SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The TX SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
3
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <05TIME OUT> ➞ press
[OK].
4
OK
The TIME OUT menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 ON> or <02 OFF> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The TIMEOUT mode is set, and the display returns to the TX SETTINGS menu.
Reset
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Transmission Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-8
TX Rotation
The TX Rotation function enables you to set a document that has a horizontal
orientation vertically on the machine. However, when the machine sends the
document, it rotates the image automatically, and sends it horizontally.
NOTE
•
•
•
You can use the TX Rotation function for an LTR document only.
The TX Rotation function is not available if you are using the Direct Sending method.
The default setting is ‘01 ON’.
Additional Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
4
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
OK
ç
F3
F4
2
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 TX SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The TX SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <07 TX ROTATION> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The TX ROTATION menu appears.
Transmission Settings
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F3
F4
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 ON> or <02 OFF> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The TX Rotation mode is set, and the display returns to the TX SETTINGS menu.
Reset
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
4
Transmission Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-10
Sequential Broadcasting to More Than One
Location
Sequential Broadcasting enables you to scan your documents once, and send
them to several locations. When you use Sequential Broadcasting, you can send
the same document to a maximum of 210 destinations.
NOTE
•
If you frequently send the same documents to several locations, use group dialing. Group
dialing enables you to register up to 199 facsimile numbers, and send the same
documents to these numbers with the press of only one or four keys. (See “Group
•
•
If you use Sequential Broadcasting frequently, and you want to make sure that all
transactions are complete, set the machine to print the Multi TX (Transaction) Report.
4
You can only print out the Multi TX (Transaction) Report when you use Sequential
Broadcasting.
1
Press [FAX].
FAX
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
2
Place your documents on the machine.
NOTE
•
•
You can also specify a sender's name with
(TTI Selector). (See “Sending a
3
Specify the destinations by entering the fax numbers one
after the other.
There are three methods you can use to enter the numbers for Sequential
Broadcasting.
Sequential Broadcasting to More Than One Location
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● To enter fax numbers using one-touch speed dialing:
❑ Press the desired one-touch speed dialing key ➞ press [OK].You can dial up to
OK
63 destinations.
● To enter fax numbers using coded speed dialing:
Coded
Dial
❑ Press [Coded Dial] ➞ enter the desired three-digit code using the numeric keys
➞ press [OK].You can dial up to 137 destinations.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PRS
7
TUV
8
WXY
9
4
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
● To enter fax numbers using regular dialing:
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
❑ Dial the desired fax number using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].You can dial
GHI
JKL
MNO
up to 10 destinations.
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
Press [Pause/Redial] to redial the last number dialed using the numeric keys.
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
NOTE
•
•
If you dial a wrong number, press
C
(Clear) ➞ enter the correct number.
You must dial the second destination within five seconds of dialing the first
destination. All subsequent destinations must be specified within 10 seconds of
each other. If you wait longer than the timeout interval before specifying the next
destination, the machine starts scanning the documents. The timeout interval can
Start
4
After you have specified all of the destinations, press [Start].
Scanning starts.
NOTE
•
Regardless of the order you used when dialing, the machine sends the documents
to the destinations you specified in the following order: one-touch speed dialing
numbers, coded speed dialing numbers, regular dialing numbers, then redialing.
Sequential Broadcasting to More Than One Location
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-12
•
•
•
If you have placed your document on the platen glass, enter the fax numbers, scan
all the papers of the document into memory ➞ press (OK).
To cancel Sequential Broadcasting, press
DURING TX/RX?> appears, press
(Stop). After the message <CANCEL
(YES) to cancel all destinations.
F3
If a number is busy or does not reply, the machine skips it and to send your
documents to the other destinations, and then redials the number that was busy or
did not reply.
•
•
The document is automatically deleted from memory when Sequential
Broadcasting is complete.
Printing the Multi TX Report
Print a Multi TX Report to make sure all your transactions completed successfully when
using Sequential Broadcasting. In order to print the Multi TX Report, you must assign the
4
01
1
2
Press the program one-touch key registered for the PRINT
REPORT function.
63
The TX REPORT display appears.
F3
Press [F3] (YES).
F4
If you do not want to print the Multi TX Report, press
(Reset) to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
(NO) ➞ press
When the machine is finished with the Sequential Broadcast, the Multi TX Report
prints.
Sequential Broadcasting to More Than One Location
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending Documents at a Preset Time
Follow this procedure to set a time for sending documents. This feature is called
“Delayed Sending.”
Use Delayed Sending to store a document in memory, then have it sent at a later
time when the telephone rates are lower.
NOTE
•
•
•
You can set up to 70 documents for Delayed Sending.
The document is automatically deleted from memory after it is sent.
4
1
Press [FAX].
FAX
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
2
Place your documents on the machine.
NOTE
•
•
You can also specify a sender’s name with
(TTI Selector). (See “Sending a
3
Open all three one-touch speed dialing panels ➞ press
[Delayed Transmission].
Delayed
Transmission
The display for entering the time for the delayed transaction appears.
NOTE
Make sure that the correct time of day is set. If the current time is not set correctly,
documents cannot be sent at the preset time.
Sending Documents at a Preset Time
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-14
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
4
5
Enter the time using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
Enter the time in 24-hour notation (e.g., 1:00 p.m. as 13:00).
Enter all the numbers, including zeros.
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.
NOTE
•
If you made a mistake entering the time, press
again.
(Clear) ➞ enter the time
F2
F3
•
You can also use
( ) or
(
) to move the cursor under the digit
4
you want to correct ➞ enter the correct digit.
Specify the destinations.
If you use the numeric keys to specify the destination, be sure to press
(OK) at the end of the number.
NOTE
•
You can send the same document to a maximum of 210 destinations, at 70 preset
times.
•
You can specify multiple destinations to be sent at a preset time (delayed
sequential broadcasting). (See “Sequential Broadcasting to More Than One
•
If you made a mistake when entering a number, press
number again.
(Clear) ➞ enter the
Start
6
Press [Start].
Scanning starts.
Sending Documents at a Preset Time
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-15
NOTE
•
If you have placed your document on the platen glass, enter the fax numbers ➞
scan all the pages of the document into memory ➞ press (OK).
•
If the message <SELECT SENDERS NAME> is displayed, you can select a
If you do not want to select a sender’s name, press
(OK).
•
•
The document is sent automatically at the preset time, and deleted from the
memory after it is sent.
You can check the result of the transmission by printing the TX Report or Activity
Setting a Delayed Transmission During a Sending
Operation
You can set a delayed transmission for a confidential mailbox, relay broadcasting, or
subaddress sending.
4
Delayed
Transmission
1
2
During a sending operation, press [Delayed Transmission].
The display for entering the time for the delayed transmissions appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Enter the time using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
WXY
9
Enter the time in 24-hour notation (e.g., 1:p.m. as 13:00).
Enter all the numbers, including zeros.
PRS
7
TUV
8
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The document is sent automatically at the preset time, and deleted from the
memory after it is sent.
NOTE
•
•
•
If you made a mistake entering the time, press
again.
(Clear) ➞ enter the time
You can also use [F2] ( ) or [F3] ( ) to move the cursor keys under the digit you
want to correct ➞ enter the correct digit.
If you set a delayed transmission for Sequential Broadcasting, it takes the
transmission longer to complete.
Sending Documents at a Preset Time
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-16
Checking and Canceling a Delayed Transmission Setting
Keep in mind that if you use the fax monitor screen to delete a document scanned into
You can also print a list of documents stored in memory in order to check the status of the
4
Sending Documents at a Preset Time
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-17
Sending a Document with a
Subaddress/Password
You can send documents with ITU-T Standard subaddresses and passwords.
In order for a transaction to succeed, the subaddress and password on both the
sending and receiving fax machines must match.
Using a subaddress/password to send documents enables you to use such
features as polling sending and memory boxes even with a machine other than a
Canon fax machine that supports ITU-T subaddresses/passwords.
If the other party has set an ITU-T subaddress and password for receiving, you
have to specify the same ITU-T subaddress and password before sending
documents.
4
NOTE
You can register ITU-T subaddresses and passwords for a one-touch speed dialing key
and a coded speed dialing code. If you register the subaddress and/or password for a
one-touch speed dialing key or a coded speed dialing code, the subaddress/password
are entered for you automatically after you press the one-touch speed dialing key or
1
2
Press [FAX].
FAX
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
Place your documents on the machine.
NOTE
•
•
You can also specify a sender’s name with
(TTI Selector). (See “Sending a
Sending a Document with a Subaddress/Password
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-18
3
Specify the destination.
If you are entering the fax number using the numeric keys, press
after entering the number.
(OK)
4
IMPORTANT
Registration of a subaddress/password is required before you send a document
with a subaddress/password using speed dialing.
NOTE
•
If you enter a wrong number, use the cursor keys to go back to the position you
want to correct press (Delete) enter the correct number.
To delete the entire entry, press (Clear).
➞
➞
•
4
5
Open all three one-touch speed dialing panels ➞ press
[Advanced Communication].
Advanced
Communication
The ADVANCED COMM. menu appears.
NOTE
•
•
You must press
(Advanced Communication) within five seconds of entering
the fax number. If you wait longer than the timeout interval, the machine starts to
scan your documents.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <04 SUBADDRESS>
➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
Sending a Document with a Subaddress/Password
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-19
The display for entering the subaddress appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
6
Enter the ITU-T subaddress using the numeric keys➞ press
[OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.
NOTE
•
•
The subaddress can be up to 20 digits long, and can include *, #, and spaces.
The subaddress (and any spaces in it) must be exactly the same as the other
party’s subaddress.
4
•
•
To enter a space, press
If you enter a wrong number, use the curser keys to go back to the position you
want to correct press (Delete) enter the correct number.
To delete the entire entry, press (Clear).
If the other party has not set a password, proceed to step 10.
(Space).
➞
➞
•
•
Advanced
Communication
7
8
If you want to enter a password, press [Advanced
Communication].
The ADVANCED COMM. menu appears.
NOTE
•
•
You must press
(Advanced Communication) within five seconds of entering
the subaddress. If you wait longer than the timeout interval, the machine starts to
scan your documents.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <05 PASSWORD>
➞ press [OK].
OK
The display for entering the password appears.
Sending a Document with a Subaddress/Password
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-20
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
9
Enter the ITU-T password using the numeric keys ➞ press
[OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.
NOTE
•
•
The password can be up to 20 digits long, and can include *, #, and spaces.
The password (and any spaces in it) must be exactly the same as the other party’s
password.
•
•
To enter a space, press
(Space).
4
If you enter a wrong number, use the cursor keys to go back to the position you
want to correct ➞ press
(Delete) ➞ enter the correct number.
(Clear)
•
To delete the entire entry, press
.
Start
10 Press [Start].
The machine starts to scan the documents, dials the number, and sends the
documents with the subaddress and password you just entered.
NOTE
F3
•
To cancel the transmission, press
(Stop)
➞
(YES) when you are
prompted to confirm the cancellation.
•
When the machine dials the fax numbers, the numbers that have a subaddress/
password registered to a one-touch speed dialing key or coded speed dialing code
take priority.
Sending a Document with a Subaddress/Password
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-21
Setting Up and Using PIN Codes
PIN (Personal Identification Number) codes prevent unauthorized personnel from
making calls. To protect privileged access to the telephone lines, only authorized
users are entrusted with the PIN codes for daily operations. Some PBX (Private
Branch Exchange) systems require that a PIN code be entered when dialing a
number to make a call or send a document by fax. Depending on the requirements
of the PBX system, the PIN code may be entered either before the number as a
prefix, or after the number as a suffix.
If your PBX requires a PIN code to connect to an outside line, the machine can be
set up to prompt you for a PIN code every time you dial.
4
Setting a PIN Code
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
OK
ç
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 TX SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The TX SETTINGS menu appears.
Setting Up and Using PIN Codes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-22
F3
F4
3
4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <08 PIN CODE> ➞ press
[OK].
OK
The PIN CODE menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 ON> ➞ press [OK].
If you want to turn ‘OFF’ the PIN code access feature, highlight <01 OFF> ➞
press
(OK) ➞ proceed to step 7.
OK
4
The NECESS. PIN CODE menu appears.
F3
F4
5
6
If your PBX always requires PIN code entry, press [F3] (▼) or
[F4] (▲) to highlight <02 ON> ➞ press [OK].
If your PBX requires PIN code entry depending on the destination, highlight <01
OK
OFF> ➞ before pressing
(OK)
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) <01 AFTER TEL NO.> or <02
BEFORE TEL NO.> to highlight ➞ press [OK].
OK
The display returns to the FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
Setting Up and Using PIN Codes
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stop
7
Press [Stop] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Dialing with a PIN Code after a Number
When <NECESS. PIN CODE> of the PIN Code setting is ‘01 OFF’, you can perform
1
2
Press [FAX].
FAX
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
Place your documents on the machine.
4
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
3
4
Enter the telephone number using the numeric keys.
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
Open all three one-touch speed dialing panels ➞ press [Pin
Code].
Pin Code
OK
5
Press [OK].
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Setting Up and Using PIN Codes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-24
NOTE
Repeat steps 3 through 5 for each telephone number in a sequential broadcast.
Start
6
7
8
Press [Start].
The display for entering the PIN code appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Enter the PIN code (up to 20 digits) using the numeric keys.
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
The PIN code is not displayed as it is entered.
4
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
Press [OK].
Transmission starts.
Dialing with a PIN Code before the Number
When <NECESS. PIN CODE> of the PIN Code setting is ‘01 OFF’, you can perform
1
2
Press [FAX].
FAX
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
Place your documents on the machine.
Setting Up and Using PIN Codes
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
4
Open all three one-touch speed dialing panels ➞ press [Pin
Code].
Pin Code
@.
ABC
2
DEF
1
GHI
4
3
MNO
6
Enter the telephone number using the numeric keys ➞ press
[OK].
JKL
5
PRS
TUV
8
WXY
7
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
4
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.
NOTE
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each telephone number in a sequential broadcast.
Start
5
6
7
Press [Start].
The display for entering the PIN code appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Enter the PIN code (up to 20 digits) using the numeric keys.
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
The PIN code is not displayed as it is entered.
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
Press [OK].
Transmission starts.
Setting Up and Using PIN Codes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-26
Setting PIN Code Access for Speed Dialing
This method enables you to register one-touch and coded speed dialing keys for
PIN code access. When a user attempts to dial with a speed dialing key, the
machine prompts the user to enter a PIN code.
When <NECESS. PIN CODE> of the PIN Code setting is ‘01 OFF’, you can perform
1
2
Select the speed dialing location to register the telephone
number.
For details on registering the telephone number for speed dialing, see “Setting
4
If the PIN code is to be dialed before the telephone number,
open all three one-touch speed dialing panels ➞ press [Pin
Code] ➞ enter the telephone number using the numeric keys.
Pin Code
@.
ABC
2
DEF
If the PIN code is to be dialed after the telephone number, enter the telephone
1
GHI
4
3
MNO
6
JKL
number before pressing
(Pin Code).
5
PRS
TUV
8
WXY
7
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
3
4
Press [OK].
Repeat the procedure to continue registering additional
telephone numbers.
Reset
5
When you are finished registering, press [Reset] to return to
the Fax Basic Features screen.
Setting Up and Using PIN Codes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-27
Using Speed Dialing with PIN Code Access
If you register the PIN code when registering numbers for automatic dialing,
1
2
Press [FAX].
FAX
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
Place your documents on the machine.
4
3
4
Press a speed dialing key.
Start
Press [Start].
The display for entering the PIN code appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
5
Enter the PIN code (up to 20 digits) using the numeric keys.
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
The PIN code is not displayed as it is entered.
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
Setting Up and Using PIN Codes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-28
OK
6
Press [OK].
Transmission starts.
Forced PIN Code Access
Follow this procedure to dial when Forced PIN Code Access (<NECESS. PIN
CODE>) has been turned ‘ON’.With Forced PIN Code Access ‘ON’, you must enter
a PIN code every time you dial.The PIN code must be entered either before or after
the number, depending on how PIN code access has been set up. (See “Setting a
1
2
3
Press [FAX].
FAX
4
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
Place your documents on the machine.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Dial the telephone number using the numeric keys or the
speed dialing keys.
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
Start
4
Press [Start].
The display for entering the PIN code appears.
Setting Up and Using PIN Codes
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
5
6
Enter the PIN code (up to 20 digits) using the numeric keys.
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
The PIN code is not displayed as it is entered.
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
Press [OK].
Transmission starts.
4
Setting Up and Using PIN Codes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-30
Receiving Documents
5
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the basic reception features.You can receive document transmissions
automatically, and either print or store them in memory.
Receiving Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Receive Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
RX Page Footer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
Printing Received Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Number of Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Printing Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Printing in Reduced Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
When the Machine Runs Out of Toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Transferring Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Transfer Box Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Changing Transfer Box Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Deleting a Transfer Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Using a Transfer Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Receiving Documents
You can receive document transmission automatically.
Available Paper Sizes
When the machine receives a document, it is printed on the same size paper
loaded in the machine.
If the machine runs out of all sizes of paper, the document is received in memory.
If the received documents are small or large in size, the following paper sizes are
selected (when the Rotate Printing mode is set to ‘ON’).
5
■ Available Paper Sizes for Received Documents
11'' x 17'' originals
LGL originals
LTR originals
LTR originals
11'' x 17'' ➞ LGL * ➞ LTR *➞ LTR * ➞ STMT x 2*
LGL ➞ 11'' x 17'' ➞ LTR *➞ LTR * ➞ STMT x 2*
LTR ➞ LTR ➞ LGL ➞ 11'' x 17'' ➞ STMT
LTR ➞ LTR ➞ 11'' x 17'' ➞ LGL ➞ STMT
STMT ➞ LTR ➞ LTR ➞ LGL ➞ 11'' x 17''
LTR ➞ LTR ➞ STMT * ➞ LGL ➞ 11'' x 17''
*
*
STMT originals
STMT originals
* Received documents automatically reduced before being printed are indicated with an asterisk (*).
NOTE
•
•
•
You can print the received document on the following paper sizes only: 11'' ✕ 17''
LGL , LTR , LTR , and STMT
,
.
If you are printing the document with paper loaded in the stack bypass, select a paper
type other than envelope. See “Selecting and Storing Settings,” in the Reference Guide.)
You can set whether to use the fax function for each paper drawer or stack bypass. The
default setting is ‘ON’ (for the fax function) for all drawers and the stack bypass. (See
“Selecting and Storing Settings,” in the Reference Guide.)
•
You can set the machine to reduce the size of the received document automatically when
it does not match the paper size available on this machine. The preset reduction ratios
•
•
The received document is output face down, and in the order it was received.
Receiving Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2
Receiving Documents into Memory
1
When the machine starts receiving a document, the In Use
Memory lamp on the control panel blinks.
If you press
(Monitor) during reception, the transaction number and the
information about the sender of the incoming document are displayed.
PRS
TUV
WXY
7
8
9
OPER
0
SYMBOLS
ID
In Use Memory
Alarm
5
2
When the machine finishes receiving, the In Use Memory lamp
on the control panel lights to show that there is a received
document in the memory.
When the received document is printed, the In Use Memory lamp turns OFF.
PRS
TUV
WXY
7
8
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
ID
In Use Memory
Alarm
NOTE
•
If the machine is in the Energy Saver mode, it resumes normal operation when it
begins receiving a document, and the In Use Memory lamp lights or blinks.
•
If the paper drawer runs out of paper, the Alarm lamp blinks.
3
The received document is printed.
The In Use Memory lamp turns OFF.
Receiving Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-3
NOTE
•
•
If the paper drawer runs out of paper, the received document is stored in memory.
The machine has enough memory (16 MB) to store up to 100 pages* of sent and
received documents (fewer if the document contains many graphics or particularly
dense text). If you have the optional memory module installed, you can store up to
1500 pages*. *These figures are based on the use of ITU-T No. 1 chart, using the
standard settings.
•
•
If the memory becomes full while you are scanning a document for sending, the
message <MEMORY FULL> appears on the LCD display. Press
(OK) so
that the paper remaining in the feeder can be put out. All the pages you were
scanning are deleted.
The number of pages you can scan into memory differs depending on the amount
of free memory remaining in the machine and the type of document you are
scanning.
•
•
The received document stored in memory because of lack of paper is printed once
you load paper in the paper drawers.
You can also change settings so that the machine does not print the received
5
•
•
If an error occurs during printing, the Alarm lamp blinks.
You can print a list of documents (Document Memory List) to check the transaction
Receiving Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-4
Receive Settings
This section describes how to set a series of reception functions.
Setting the ECM for Receiving
You can set to receive documents using ECM (Error Correction Mode), which
corrects errors that occur during a transmission. To send and receive in ECM, it is
necessary that both the sending party and receiving party have activated the ECM
on their machine. Otherwise, this function is ignored.
If the telephone line is in poor condition, it is possible that an error may occur, even
if you are using ECM.
5
NOTE
The default setting is ‘01 ON’.
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions].
The ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
Receive Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-5
F3
F4
3
4
5
6
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <04 RX SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The RX SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 ECM RX> ➞ press
[OK].
OK
5
The ECM RX menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 ON> or <02 OFF> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The display returns to the RX SETTINGS menu.
Reset
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Receive Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-6
RX Page Footer
Follow the procedure below to set the machine to print the time, transaction
number, page number, etc., on the pages of received documents.
NOTE
The default setting is ‘01 OFF’.
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
OK
5
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <04 RX SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
THE RX SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 RX PAGE FOOTER>
➞ press [OK]
OK
The RX PAGE FOOTER menu appears.
Receive Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-7
F3
F4
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 OFF> or <02 ON> ➞
Press [OK]
OK
The display returns to the RX SETTINGS menu.
Reset
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
2 on 1 Mode
Follow the procedure below to set the machine to print two pages of received
documents on one sheet of paper.
5
To use this feature, the following conditions should be met:
• The paper loaded into the selected paper drawer must be large enough for two
consecutive pages to be printed on it.
• If the machine runs out of LTR paper and has 11" × 17" paper remaining, the
machine prints two LTR pages side by side on one 11" × 17" paper.
• Conversely, if the machine runs out of 11" × 17" paper and has LTR paper
remaining, the machine reduces the image size automatically, and prints two LTR
pages that equal one 11" × 17" piece of paper one by one on LTR paper.
A separation line is printed in the center of each page using the 2 on 1 feature. If
the machine is set to print the RX page footer, the separation line is printed in the
location that corresponds to the center of page after excluding the RX page footer
printing area.
NOTE
The default setting is ‘01 OFF’.
Additional Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
OK
Receive Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-8
F3
F4
2
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <04 RX SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The RX SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
3
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 2 on 1> ➞ press
[OK].
OK
5
The 2 on 1 menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 OFF> or <02 ON> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The display returns to the FAX SETTINGS menu.
Reset
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Receive Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-9
Printing Received Documents
This section describes the settings related to the printing of received documents.
Number of Copies
Follow the procedure below to set how many copies are to be printed when the
machine receives documents.
NOTE
The default setting is ‘01COPIES’.
5
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions].
The ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <05 PRINTER
SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The PRINTER SETTINGS menu appears.
Printing Received Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-10
F3
F4
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 # OF RX COPIES> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The display for entering the number of RX copies appears.
F2
F3
Press [F2] (-) or [F3] (+) to enter the number of copies (from 01
to 99) ➞ press [OK].
You can also use the numeric keys to enter the number of copies.
OK
5
The display returns to the PRINTER SETTINGS menu.
Reset
6
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Printing Methods
Follow the procedure below to set how to print when the machine does not have the
same paper sizes loaded in the same orientation as the received document.
There are four printing methods (switches A, B, C, and D):
• DRAWER SW A: Sections of an image are printed on two sheets of paper that
have the same combined size as the received document.
Printing Received Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-11
• DRAWER SW B: Received documents are printed with an added blank space on
paper that has the same width as the received document.
• DRAWER SW C: Images are reduced and printed on paper that differs in width
from the received document.
• DRAWER SW D: Images are printed on paper that is larger in size than the
received document.
5
NOTE
•
For details about paper drawer selection when printing received documents, see
•
The default setting is ‘01 ON’ for all switches.
Additional Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
OK
Printing Received Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-12
F3
F4
2
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <05 PRINTER
SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The PRINTER SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 SELECT DRAWER>
➞ press [OK].
OK
5
The SELECT DRAWER menu appears.
F3
F4
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight a drawer ➞ press [OK].
OK
The display for setting the drawers to automatically switch to a different paper
drawer appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 ON> or <02 OFF> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The display returns to the SELECT DRAWER menu.
Reset
6
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Printing Received Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-13
Printing in Reduced Form
Follow the procedure below to set the machine to print received documents in a
reduced size to match the paper sizes loaded in the paper drawers.
If you set the RX REDUCTION to ‘01 ON’, you can set the following settings (the
default settings are marked with an asterisk):
• RX REDUCTION (AUTO REDUCTION*/FIXED REDUCTION):You can select to
reduce the document automatically or select a preset reduction ratio.
• SELECT REDUCE % (97%, 95%, 90%*, or 75%):You can select a preset
reduction ratio.
• SELECT REDUCE DIR (HORIZ & VERTICAL*, or VERTICAL ONLY):You can
select to reduce the document both vertically and horizontally, or just vertically at a
fixed reduction ratio.
NOTE
The default setting for RX REDUCTION is ‘01 ON’.
5
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
OK
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <05 PRINTER
SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
Printing Received Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-14
F3
F4
3
4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 RX REDUCTION> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The RX REDUCTION menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 ON> or <02 OFF>.
5
● If you selected <02 OFF>:
❑ Press [OK].
OK
The setting is complete, and the display returns to the PRINTER SETTINGS
menu.
● If you selected <01 ON>:
OK
F3
❑ Press [OK] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 RX REDUCTION> or
<02 SELECT REDUCE DIR> ➞ press [OK].
F4
OK
❑ Proceed to step 5 or 6.
F3
5
To set <01 RX REDUCTION>, press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <01 AUTO SELECTION> or <02 FIXED REDUCTION>
➞ press [OK].
F4
OK
Printing Received Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-15
● If you selected <01 AUTO SELECTION>:
❑ Press [OK].
OK
The image reduction is adjusted automatically, and the display returns to the
RX REDUCTION menu.
● If you selected <02 FIXED REDUCTION>:
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to select a preset reduction ratio (<01 97%>, <02
95%>, <03 90%>, or <04 75%>) ➞ press [OK].
OK
The display returns to the RX REDUCTION menu.
F3
6
To set <02 SELECT REDUCE DIR>, press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲)
to highlight <01VERTICAL ONLY> or <02 HORIZ &VERTICAL>
➞ press [OK].
5
F4
OK
<01 VERTICAL ONLY>: The received document is reduced vertically only.
<02 HORIZ & VERTICAL>: The received document is reduced both horizontally
and vertically.
The display returns to the PRINTER SETTINGS menu.
Reset
7
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Printing Received Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-16
When the Machine Runs Out of Toner
Follow the procedure below to set whether to continue printing or to cancel printing
and store the received document into memory automatically.
NOTE
The default setting for TONER SUPPLY LOW is ‘01 RX TO MEMORY’.
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
OK
5
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <05 PRINTER
SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <04 TONER SUPPLY
LOW> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The TONER SUPPLY LOW menu appears.
Printing Received Documents
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F3
F4
4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 RXTO MEMORY> or
<02 KEEP PRINTING> ➞ press [OK].
<01 RX TO MEMORY>: Stops printing, and receives the remainder of the
document in memory.
OK
<02 KEEP PRINTING>: Ignores the warning and keeps printing until the
document is completely printed. This setting is convenient when a new toner
cartridge is not at hand. However, even if the toner cartridge is out of toner, the
machine will not receive the document in memory. After installing the new toner
cartridge, be sure to set ‘RX TO MEMORY’.
The display returns to the FAX SETTINGS menu.
5
Reset
5
Press [Reset] to return to Fax Basic Features screen.
Printing Received Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-18
Transferring Documents
Transfer Box Settings Table
The transfer mode tells the machine to receive documents and then transfer them
automatically to a fax machine at your home or another work site.
To use the transfer mode, you need to register the fax number to transfer the
documents this machine receives.
The day and time for the machine to switch to transfer mode can be preset. This
feature is especially convenient for receiving important documents coming from
countries overseas, several time zones removed from your own.
5
You can set the following settings for the document transfer:
Item
Description
Setting
Up to 24 letters
and numbers
01 FILE NAME
Sets up the name of the transfer box.
Specify the number(s) of the fax machine(s)
where you want documents transferred using
speed dialing.
02 SELECT
LOCATIONS
Up to 200
destinations
Sets up the password that protects the settings of
the transfer box. If you open this transfer box to
view or make changes, you have to enter this
password.You also have to enter this password to
print a document received in the transfer box.
Up to seven
digits
03 PASSWORD
Enables you to set the machine to receive and
transfer documents only from originator fax
machines that you designate.
04 SELECT ORIG
UNIT
OFF, ON*
START TIME,
END TIME (five
times for each)
Sets the time to turn ON and OFF the transfer
mode.
05 TIME SETUP
Sets the machine to print a copy of the documents
received in the transfer box.
06 PRINT RX DOC.
OFF*, ON
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
Transferring Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-19
NOTE
•
•
If the transfer mode is set to ‘OFF’, the machine does not transfer documents.
The machine can transfer documents received in normal receive mode. It cannot transfer
documents received in the memory box or by polling receiving.
•
You can set the machine to transfer documents only from selected originators (SELECT
ORIG UNIT).
•
•
•
The destination fax number must be registered for one-touch or coded speed dialing.
The transfer mode is set to ‘OFF’ at the default setting.
If you made a mistake when setting the file name, location, password, originator unit, and
printing of the RX document, use the cursor keys to go back to the position you want to
correct ➞ press
(Delete) ➞ enter the correct value.
•
•
To delete the entire entry, press
(Clear).
If you made a mistake entering the start time or end time, use the cursor keys to go back
to the digit you want to correct ➞ enter the correct digit. To delete the entire entry, press
(Clear).
•
If you set <SELECT ORIG UNIT>, the machine checks the last six digits of the fax
number registered under one-touch or coded speed dialing.Therefore, if the fax number
does not have six digits, this function does not work.
5
Creating a Transfer Box
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions].
The ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
Transferring Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-20
F3
F4
3
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <06 FILE SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The FILE SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <05 TRANSFER> ➞
press [OK].
OK
5
The TRANSFER menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 SETUP FILE> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The SETUP FILE menu appears.
NOTE
If you stop creating the transfer box by pressing
(Stop) and after that you want
to restart to create it, select <02 CHANGE DATA> and continue setting.
F3
F4
6
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 FILE NAME> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The display for entering a name for the transfer box appears.
Transferring Documents
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
7
Enter a name for the transfer box using the numeric keys (up
to 24 characters) ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The message <DATA ENTRY OK> appears on the display for about two seconds,
and then returns to the SETUP FILE menu.
NOTE
•
For details about entering letters, see Chapter 2, “Basic Operations,” in the
Reference Guide.
•
The name can be up to 24 characters long and may include numbers, symbols,
and spaces.
F3
F4
5
8
9
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 SELECT
LOCATIONS> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The display for specifying the destinations appears.
01
Specify the destinations using speed dialing.
The destination names registered under speed dialing keys are displayed.
63
Coded
Dial
NOTE
You can enter up to 200 destinations.
Transferring Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-22
OK
10 Repeat step 9 until you finish specifying all the destinations ➞
press [OK].
The display returns to the SETUP FILE menu.
F3
F4
11 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 PASSWORD> ➞
press [OK].
OK
5
The display for entering the password appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
12 Enter a password (up to seven digits) using the numeric keys
➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the SETUP FILE menu.
IMPORTANT
You cannot set a password starting with a zero (0).
F3
F4
13 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <04 SELECT ORIG
UNIT> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The display for selecting the originator machine to transfer documents appears.
Transferring Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-23
F3
F4
14 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 OFF> or <02 ON> ➞
press [OK].
OK
● If you selected <01 OFF>:
❑ Proceed to step 15.
● If you selected <02 ON>:
❑ Enter the originator’s fax number using speed dialing ➞ press [OK].
01
63
Coded
Dial
5
OK
The display returns to the SETUP FILE menu.
F3
15 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <05 TIME SETUP> ➞
press [OK].
F4
OK
The TIME SETUP menu appears.
F3
F4
16 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 START TIME> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The START TIME menu appears.
Transferring Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-24
F3
F4
17 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 EVERYDAY> or <02
SELECT DAYS> ➞ press [OK].
OK
● If you selected <01 EVERYDAY>:
F3
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight a number (from 01 to 05) ➞ press [OK].
F4
OK
The display for entering the time to switch to the Transfer mode appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
5
❑ Enter the time in 24-hour notation (e.g., 1:00 p.m. as 13:00) using the numeric
keys ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PRS
7
TUV
8
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The message <DATA ENTRY OK> appears on the screen for about two
seconds, and the display for selecting the preset time appears.
NOTE
You can set up to five different start times every day to transfer your documents.
● If you selected <02 SELECT DAYS>:
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight a day of the week ➞ press [OK].
OK
The display for selecting the preset time number appears.
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight a number (from 01 to 05) ➞ press [OK].
OK
Transferring Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-25
The display for entering the time to switch to the Transfer mode appears.
❑ Enter the time in 24-hour notation (e.g., 1:00 p.m. as 13:00) using the numeric
keys ➞ press [OK].
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PRS
7
TUV
8
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The message <DATA ENTRY OK> appears on the screen for about two
seconds, and the display for selecting the preset time appears.
NOTE
You can set up to five different start times on the selected day to transfer your
documents.
BACK
18 To finish setting the transfer start time, press [BACK] until the
TIME SETUP menu appears.
5
F3
F4
19 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 ENDTIME> ➞ press
[OK].
OK
The END TIME menu appears.
20 Follow the procedure in step 17 to set the Transfer end time.
BACK
21 To finish setting the Transfer end time, press [BACK] until the
SETUP FILE menu appears.
Transferring Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-26
F3
F4
22 If you want to print a list of received documents in your
transfer box, press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <06 PRINT
RX DOC.> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The PRINT RX DOC. menu appears.
F3
F4
23 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 OFF> or <02 ON>.
5
● If you selected <01 OFF>:
❑ Press [OK].
OK
The transfer setting is complete, and the display returns to the TRANSFER
menu.
● If you selected <02 ON>:
OK
F2
❑ Press [OK] ➞ press [F2] (–) or [F3] (+) to enter the number of RX copies (from
01 to 99) ➞ press [OK].
You can also use the numeric keys to enter the required number of copies.
F3
OK
The display returns to the TRANSFER menu.
Reset
24 Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Transferring Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-27
Changing Transfer Box Settings
Additional Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
OK
F3
F4
2
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <06 FILE SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
5
F3
F4
3
4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <05 TRANSFER> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The TRANSFER menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 CHANGE DATA> ➞
press [OK].
OK
If you set a password for the transfer box, the display for entering your password
appears. Proceed to the next step.
Transferring Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-28
If a password has not been set for the transfer box you selected, the CHANGE
DATA menu appears. Proceed to step 6.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
5
If the message <ENTER AN ID NUMBER> is displayed, enter
the password of the transfer box using the numeric keys ➞
press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The CHANGE DATA menu appears.
6
7
Change the settings.
For details on how to select and change the settings, refer to the procedures
5
Reset
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Deleting a Transfer Box
Additional Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
OK
F3
F4
2
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <06 FILE SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
Transferring Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-29
The FILE SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
3
4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <05 TRANSFER> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The TRANSFER menu appears.
5
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 DELETE FILE> ➞
press [OK].
OK
If you set a password for the transfer box, the display for entering your password
appears. Proceed to the next step.
If a password has not been set for the transfer box you selected, the selected box
is deleted. Proceed to step 6.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
5
6
If the message <ENTER AN ID NUMBER> is displayed, enter
the password of the transfer box using the numeric keys ➞
press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The selected transfer box is deleted.
Reset
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Transferring Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-30
Using a Transfer Box
You can create a memory box to receive documents, and then transfer them
automatically to other fax machines. The day and time for the unit to switch to the
Transfer mode can be preset. This feature is especially convenient for receiving
incoming documents at home when you are absent from the office at night or
during holidays.
NOTE
1
2
3
Create a transfer box for document transfer.
5
Press [FAX].
FAX
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
Open all three one-touch speed dialing panels ➞ press
[Transfer].
Transfer
If you set a password for the transfer box, the display for entering your password
appears. Enter the password of the transfer box using the numeric keys ➞ press
(OK).
If you did not set a password, the display returns to the Fax Basic Features
screen.
If the Transfer mode is set to ‘ON’, when the machine receives a document, it will
transfer the document to the destination set for document transfer.
Transferring Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-31
5
Transferring Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-32
Memory Features
6
CHAPTER
This chapter explains how you can store multiple documents in the machine’s memory, and
recall them at a later date.
Memory Lock for Received Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Turning Memory Lock ON/OFF Using the Memory Reception Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Checking Documents Stored in Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Using a Memory Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-17
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Lock for Received Documents
The Memory Lock mode enables you to lock the machine to receive and store all
documents in memory and not to print the received document automatically.
Memory Lock also enables your machine to store received documents during
holidays or at night and print them at a later date. (See “Printing a Document
NOTE
•
•
If MEMORY LOCK RX is set to ‘01 OFF’, the Memory Lock mode does not work.
The default setting is ‘01 OFF’.
Additional Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions].
The ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS menu appears.
6
F3
F4
2
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <07 SYSTEM
SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
If a system administrator’s ID and password have been set, enter them after
selecting <07 SYSTEM SETTINGS>. (See Chapter 6, “System Manager
Settings,” in the Reference Guide.)
OK
Memory Lock for Received Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-2
The SYSTEM SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 MEMORY LOCK RX>
➞ press [OK].
OK
The MEMORY LOCK RX menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 OFF> or <02 ON> ➞
press [OK].
6
If you selected <01 OFF>, the memory lock setting is complete. Proceed to step
17.
OK
If you selected <02 ON>, proceed to step 6.
F3
F4
6
If you want to set a memory lock password, press [F3] (▼) or
[F4] (▲) to highlight <01 MEM LOCK PASSWORD> ➞ press
[OK].
OK
The display for entering the memory lock password appears.
Memory Lock for Received Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-3
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
7
Enter the memory lock password (up to seven digits) using
the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The MEMORY LOCK RX menu appears.
IMPORTANT
•
•
You cannot set a password starting with a zero.
Be sure not to forget the memory lock password. Store it in a safe place.
F3
F4
8
9
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 REPORT> ➞ press
[OK].
OK
6
The REPORT menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 OUTPUTYES> or
<02 OUTPUT NO> ➞ press [OK].
You can set the machine to print RX or activity reports.
OK
<01 OUTPUT YES>: A report prints while the machine is in the Memory Lock
mode.
<02 OUTPUT NO>: No report prints while the machine in the Memory Lock
mode. This is the default setting.
The display returns to the MEMORY LOCK RX menu.
Memory Lock for Received Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-4
F3
F4
10 If you want to set up a time for the machine to enter and leave
the Memory Lock mode, press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight
<03 TIME SETUP> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The TIME SETUP menu appears.
F3
F4
11 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 OFF> or <02 ON> ➞
press [OK].
Time settings can be made for every day or for selected days of the week. The
time settings are optional. If you do not want to set up the times, you can use
(Memory Reception) to turn the Memory Lock mode ON and OFF.
OK
If you selected <01 OFF>, the Memory Lock time settings are complete.
If you selected <02 ON>, proceed to step 12.
6
The TIME SETUP menu appears.
F3
F4
12 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 START TIME> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The START TIME menu appears.
Memory Lock for Received Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-5
F3
F4
13 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 EVERYDAY> or <02
SELECT DAYS> ➞ press [OK].
OK
● If you selected <01 EVERYDAY>:
F3
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight a number (from 01 to 05) ➞ press [OK].
F4
OK
The display for entering the time to switch to the Memory Lock mode appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
❑ Enter the time in 24-hour notation (e.g. 1:00 p.m. as 13:00) using the numeric
keys ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PRS
7
TUV
8
WXY
9
6
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The message <DATA ENTRY OK> appears on the screen for about two
seconds, and the display for selecting the preset time number appears.
NOTE
You can set up to five different start times to switch the machine in and out of the
Memory Lock mode.
● If you selected <02 SELECT DAYS>:
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight a day of the week ➞ press [OK].
OK
The display for selecting the preset time number appears.
Memory Lock for Received Documents
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight a number (from 01 to 05) ➞ press [OK].
OK
The display for entering the time to switch to the Memory Lock mode appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
❑ Enter the time in 24-hour notation (e.g. 1:00 p.m as 13:00) using the numeric
keys ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PRS
7
TUV
8
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The message <DATA ENTRY OK> appears on the screen for about two
seconds, and the display for selecting the preset time number appears.
NOTE
You can set up to five different start times on the selected day to switch the
machine in and out of the Memory Lock mode.
6
BACK
14 To finish setting the Memory Lock start time, press [BACK]
until the TIME SETUP menu appears.
F3
F4
15 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 ENDTIME> ➞ press
[OK].
OK
The END TIME menu appears.
Memory Lock for Received Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-7
16 Follow the procedure in step 13 to set the Memory Lock end
time.
Reset
17 Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Turning Memory Lock ON/OFF Using the Memory
Reception Key
You can turn the Memory Lock mode ON and OFF at any time you want even if you
have set the Memory Lock start and end time.
To use this mode, you must set MEMORY LOCK RX to ‘02 ON’ from the SYSTEM
If you have set a Memory Lock password, you need to enter it correctly to turn the
memory Lock mode ON or OFF using [Memory Reception].
6
1
2
Press [FAX].
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
FAX
Open all three one-touch speed dialing panels ➞ press
[Memory Reception].
Memory
If you have set a Memory Lock password, use the numeric keys to enter the
Reception
password ➞ press
(OK).
NOTE
•
•
•
If you have set the memory lock start time, the function is turned ‘ON’ automatically
at the preset time.
If you have set the memory lock end time, the function is turned ‘OFF’ automatically
at the preset time, and the machine prints the received documents.
The machine has enough memory (16 MB) to sore up to 100 pages* of sent and
received documents (fewer if the document contains many graphics or particularly
dense text). If you have the optional memory module installed, you can store up to
1500 pages*. *These figures are based on the use of ITU-T No.1 chart, using the
standard settings.
Memory Lock for Received Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-8
•
•
If the memory becomes full while you are scanning a document for sending, the
message <MEMORY FULL> appears on the LCD display. Press (OK) so
that the paper remaining in the feeder can be output. All the pages you were
scanning are deleted.
The number of pages you can scan into memory differs depending on the amount
of free memory remaining in the machine and the type of document you are
scanning.
6
Memory Lock for Received Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-9
Checking Documents Stored in Memory
This section explains the methods to check and change the status of received
documents.
Printing a List of Documents in Memory
Follow the procedure below to print a list of documents (Document Memory List) to
check the transaction results.
The Document Memory List contains the transaction number, transaction mode,
destination, page number, document set time, start time, and sender’s name.
You can print the list by pressing [Report] and selecting DOC. MEMORY LIST, or by
pressing [Memory Reference] and selecting DOC. MEMORY LIST.
Using the Report Key
6
1
Press [FAX].
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
FAX
2
Open all three one-touch speed dialing panels ➞ press
[Report].
Report
The REPORT menu appears on the display.
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <04 DOC. MEMORY
LIST> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
Checking Documents Stored in Memory
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-10
The document memory list is printed.
Using the Memory Reference Key
1
Press [FAX].
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
FAX
2
Open all three one-touch speed dialing panels ➞ press
[Memory Reference].
Memory
Reference
The MEMORY REFERENCE menu appears on the display.
6
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 DOC. MEMORY
LIST> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The document memory list is printed, and you can check the detailed information
about the documents waiting to be sent or the received documents.
Checking Documents Stored in Memory
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-11
Printing a Document Received in Memory
The In Use Memory lamp lights when there are received documents in memory.
1
2
Press [FAX].
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
FAX
Open all three one-touch speed dialing panels ➞ press
[Memory Reception].
Memory
Reception
If you have set a Memory Lock password, use the numeric keys to enter the
password ➞ press
(OK).
The Memory Lock mode is turned ‘OFF’, and the machine prints the received
documents in memory.
The documents stored in memory are deleted automatically after they are printed.
NOTE
6
If there is no document stored in memory, the In Use Memory lamp is not lit. When
you press
(Memory Reception), the Memory Lock mode is turned ‘OFF’, and
no document is printed.
Resending a Document after an Error
Follow the procedure below to resend a document after an error.
1
2
Press [FAX].
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
FAX
Open all three one-touch speed dialing panels ➞ press
[Memory Reference].
Memory
Reference
The MEMORY REFERENCE menu appears.
Checking Documents Stored in Memory
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-12
F3
F4
3
4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 MEMORY
RETRANSMT> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
A list of documents that failed to transmit from memory is displayed.
F2
F3
Press [F2] (▼) or [F3] (▲) to highlight the document you want
to resend ➞ press [OK].
6
OK
The machine starts to resend the document you selected.
Sending a Document in Memory to a Different Destination
Follow the procedure below to select another destination for a document stored in
memory.
NOTE
You can send documents to a different destination for the following functions only: polling
sending, documents received in memory when the toner or paper runs out, confidential
mailbox reception, memory box reception, and documents that remain in memory when
an error occurs during sending (only if this setting has been enabled).
1
Press [FAX].
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
FAX
Checking Documents Stored in Memory
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-13
2
3
Open all three one-touch speed dialing panels ➞ press
[Memory Reference].
Memory
Reference
The MEMORY REFERENCE menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <04 RESEND
DOCUMENT> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
6
F2
F3
4
5
Press [F2] (▼) or [F3] (▲) to highlight the document you want
to send to another destination ➞ press [OK].
OK
OK
Specify the new destination ➞ press [OK].
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Checking Documents Stored in Memory
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-14
•
•
If the message <SELECT SENDERS NAME> is displayed, you can select a
If you do not want to select a sender’s name, press
(OK).
Start
6
Press [Start].
The machine sends the document to the new destination.
Deleting a Received Document from Memory
Follow the procedure below to delete received documents from memory.
1
2
Press [FAX].
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
FAX
Open all three one-touch speed dialing panels ➞ press
[Memory Reference].
6
Memory
Reference
The MEMORY REFERENCE menu appears.
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <05 DELETE
DOCUMENT> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
A list of the documents in memory is displayed.
Checking Documents Stored in Memory
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-15
F2
F3
4
5
Press [F2] (▼) or [F3] (▲) to highlight the document you want
to delete ➞ press [OK].
OK
The message <OK TO DELETE?> is displayed.
F3
Press [F3] (YES).
F4
If you do not want to delete the document, press
(NO).
The selected document is deleted.
NOTE
6
•
•
The document that is currently being printed cannot be deleted.
If you select a document that is currently being received, the message <CANCEL
F3
DURING TX/RX?> is displayed. Press
document.
(YES) to cancel receiving the
Checking Documents Stored in Memory
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-16
Using a Memory Box
This section shows you how to use the memory features of this machine.
A memory box is a location in the memory where you can store scanned or
received documents for printing or transmitting to other destinations.
There are four types of memory boxes: Confidential Mailbox, Memory Box for Relay
Broadcasting, Polling Box, and Memory Box for Document Transfer.
Before you use the memory box feature, you need to set up a memory box to suit
your purpose.You also have to register the password and ITU-T subaddress.
IMPORTANT
You can register only one memory box for document transfer.
NOTE
You can set up memory boxes using the FAX SETTINGS menu from the Additional
6
Storing Documents in a Memory Box
To use the Polling Box feature, store the documents into a memory box.
1
2
Press [FAX].
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
FAX
Place your documents on the machine.
NOTE
•
•
You can also specify a sender’s name with
(TTI Selector). (See “Sending a
Using a Memory Box
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-17
3
4
Open all three one-touch speed dialing panels ➞ press
[Advanced Communication].
Advanced
Communication
The ADVANCED COMM. menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 POLLING> ➞ press
[OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
6
The setting menu for the selected memory box appears.
F3
F4
5
6
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight the sending feature for
the memory box to be used ➞ press [OK].
OK
The display for entering the memory box number appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Use the numeric keys to enter the memory box number (from
00 to 99) ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display for selecting the sender’s name appears.
Using a Memory Box
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-18
F3
F4
7
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight the sender’s name ➞
press [OK].
If you do not select a sender’s name, the unit’s name will be used instead.
OK
The machine starts scanning the document.
NOTE
•
•
•
The transaction number will be used when you want to change or cancel polling
sending settings.
If you have placed your document on the platen glass, press
scanning all pages of the document into memory.
(OK) after
If the document is polled by another party, the document is deleted from the
memory. However, you can set your machine to keep the document in memory
•
You can delete a document scanned into a polling box using
(Memory
6
Printing/Deleting Documents from a Memory Box
Follow this procedure to print or delete documents stored in a memory box.
1
2
Press [FAX].
FAX
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
Open all three one-touch speed dialing panels ➞ press
[Memory Reference].
Memory
Reference
The MEMORY REFERENCE menu appears.
Using a Memory Box
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight the memory reference
function you want to use.
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
● To print the document:
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 PRINT DOCUMENT> ➞ press [OK].
OK
A list of the documents stored in memory is displayed.
6
● To delete the document:
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <05 DELETE DOCUMENT> ➞ press
[OK].
OK
A list of the documents stored in memory is displayed.
F2
4
Press [F2] (▼) or [F3] (▲) to highlight the document you want
to print or delete ➞ press [OK].
F3
OK
Using a Memory Box
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-20
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
5
6
If you are asked to enter the memory box password, use the
numeric keys to enter the password ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The confirmation message to complete the operation is displayed.
F3
Press [F3] (YES) ➞ [OK].
OK
The selected document is printed or deleted.
6
Using a Memory Box
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-21
6
Using a Memory Box
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-22
Relay Broadcasting
7
CHAPTER
This chapter describes how to relay documents and how to have documents relayed for you.
You can set up your machine as a relay station to relay documents that you receive, or you can
send documents to another machine, and have the documents relayed for you.
What Is Relay Broadcasting? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Setting Up Your Machine as a Relay Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Relay Broadcasting Memory Box Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Using Relay Broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Sending a Document to a Relay Unit for Relay Broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Is Relay Broadcasting?
In a relay broadcast, the originator fax machine sends a document over a long
distance to another fax machine called the “relay unit.” After the relay unit receives
your document, it automatically sends the document to several other fax machines
in the local area. In this way, you can send a document to several fax machines in
the same locality with only one long distance transmission.You can also preset the
time to send the relay documents.
In a relay network, your machine can function as both an originator and a relay unit.
If your machine is the “originator,” it sends a document to a relay unit from which the
document is relayed to several destinations in the same locality. If your machine is
the “relay unit,” it receives a document from another party, and your machine relays
it to one or several other facsimile machines in your own locality.
Relay Unit
Branch 1
7
Branch 2
Originator
Branch 3
NOTE
To use relay broadcasting, you have to create a memory box, and let the other party
know its ITU-T subaddress and password. Setting the password for the memory box is
What Is Relay Broadcasting?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-2
Setting Up Your Machine as a Relay Unit
In this section we will show you how to set up and manage a relay network with the
standard relay features provided in your machine.
Before you set up your machine to relay documents sent to you from the originator
fax machine, confirm the following points:
• Make sure the fax/telephone number of the originator fax machine is registered on
your machine under a speed dialing key.
• After your machine receives a document from the originator, it relays the
document to one or several destination units. Make sure the fax/telephone
numbers of all the destination units are registered on your machine under speed
dialing keys.
• Ask the originator if they would like to receive a report of successful transmissions
after your machine relays the document.
• Make sure the relay feature on your machine is turned ‘ON’.
7
• Be sure to contact the originator, and inform the originator unit of the subaddress
and password of your machine.
Follow the procedure in this section to set up your machine as the relay unit. If your
machine is the relay unit, it receives the document from the originator, and relays it
to several other destinations.
Relay Broadcasting Memory Box Settings Table
A relay box is a memory box where the documents sent by other fax machines are
stored, and this machine relays them to other destinations.
You can preset the time to have the machine relay the documents in the relay box.
You can set the following settings for a relay box:
Item
Description
Setting
01 GROUP DIAL
NAME
Up to 24 letters
and numbers
Specify a name for the relay group.
Sets up the password that protects the settings of
the relay group, and the printing of a document
received in the relay box.
02 PASSWORD
Up to 7 digits
Setting Up Your Machine as a Relay Unit
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-3
Item
Description
Setting
SUBADDRESS,
SENDER’S FAX
NO., or MAIL
ADDRESS
Sets up the ITU-T subaddress, sender’s fax
number, or e-mail address.
03 TRIGGER
Sets up the ITU-T password of the relay box. This
setting is optional. However, if you set an ITU-T
04 RX PASSWORD password for your relay box, the sending party
must enter the correct password to send
Up to 20 letters
and numbers
documents to your relay box.
If your machine is the relay unit, this feature forces
05 SELECT ORIG
UNIT
your machine to check the identity of the
originator before it receives the document, and
relays it to other units.
ON*, OFF
If your machine is the relay unit, this setting
06 PRINT RX DOC. determines if your machine prints a copy of every OFF*, ON
document that it relays.
This item enables you to select the fax machines
to receive the document your machine relays.The One-touch or
07 SELECT
LOCATIONS
number of fax machines to receive the document coded speed
must be registered for one-touch or coded speed dialing, or group
dialing.You cannot enter a number with regular
dialing.
dialing
7
This feature determines if your machine returns a NOT
08 TX REPORT
relay transmission report to the originator after
your machine receives and relays a document.
TRANSMIT,
TRANSMIT*
Up to five times
to relay
documents
within a 24-hour
period everyday.
You can set your machine to hold documents, and
then relay them at a preset time. If you do not set
this item, all documents received for relay are
relayed immediately.
09 TX START TIME
10 RELAY B'CAST
This feature switches relay broadcasting ‘ON’ and
‘OFF’ without altering any of the other settings.
ON*, OFF
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
NOTE
•
To transmit the TX report to the originator fax machine, you need to set <SELECT ORIG
UNIT>.
•
If you made a mistake when entering the file name, password, RX password, or
destination, use the cursor keys to go back to the position you want to correct ➞ press
(Delete) ➞ enter the correct value.
•
To delete the entire entry, press
(Clear).
Setting Up Your Machine as a Relay Unit
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-4
•
•
If you made a mistake entering the TX start time, use the cursor keys to go back to the
digit you want to correct ➞ enter the correct digit. To delete the entire entry, press
(Clear).
If you set <SELECT ORIG UNIT>, the machine checks the last six digits of the fax
number registered under one-touch or coded speed dialing.Therefore, if the fax number
does not have six digits, this function does not work.
Creating a Relay Group
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions].
The ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
7
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <06 FILE SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The FILE SETTINGS menu appears.
Setting Up Your Machine as a Relay Unit
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-5
F3
F4
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 RELAY TX GROUP>
➞ press [OK].
OK
The RELAY TX GROUP menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 SETUP FILE> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The display to enter the relay transmission group number appears.
NOTE
If you do not want to create the relay group, press
(Stop). If you realize you
want to restart creating it, select <02 CHANGE DATA>, and continue setting it.
7
F2
F3
6
7
Press [F2] (-) or [F3] (+) to enter the RelayTX group (from 00 to
99) number ➞ press [OK].
You can also use the numeric keys to enter the group number.
OK
The display for creating a relay group appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 GROUP DIAL
NAME> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The display for entering a name for the group you are creating appears.
Setting Up Your Machine as a Relay Unit
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-6
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
8
9
Enter a name for the relay group (up to 24 characters) using
the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The message <DATA ENTRY OK> appears on the screen for about two seconds,
and the display returns to the SETUP FILE menu.
NOTE
•
For details about entering letters, see Chapter 2, “Basic Operations,” in the
Reference Guide.
•
The name can be up to 24 characters long, and may include numbers, symbols,
and spaces.
F3
F4
If you want to set a password, press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <02 PASSWORD> ➞ press [OK].
OK
7
The display for entering a password appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
10 Enter a password (up to seven digits) using the numeric keys
➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the SETUP FILE menu.
IMPORTANT
You cannot set a password starting with a zero.
Setting Up Your Machine as a Relay Unit
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-7
F3
F4
11 To set up a subaddress, sender’s fax number, or e-mail
address, press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 TRIGGER>
➞ press [OK].
OK
The TRIGGER menu appears.
F3
F4
12 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight either <01
SUBADDRESS>, <02 SENDER'S FAX NO.>, or <03 MAIL
ADDRESS (To)>.
● If you selected <01 SUBADDRESS>:
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
7
❑ Use the numeric keys to enter an ITU-T subaddress ➞ press [OK].
3
MNO
6
GHI
JKL
4
5
PRS
7
TUV
8
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the TRIGGER menu.
NOTE
The subaddress can be up to 20 digits long, and can include *, #, and spaces.
● If you selected <02 SENDER'S FAX NO.>:
❑ Specify the sender’s fax number using one-touch or coded speed dialing ➞
01
press [OK].
63
Coded
Dial
OK
The display returns to the TRIGGER menu.
Setting Up Your Machine as a Relay Unit
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● If you selected <03 MAIL ADDRESS (To)>:
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight an e-mail address from the list ➞ press
F3
F4
[OK].
If you select <00 DO NOT USE>, e-mail addresses are not used as a trigger to
relay documents.
OK
The display returns to the SETUP FILE menu. Proceed to step 14.
NOTE
If you use the relay function when the optional network board is installed, you can
send documents to other destinations whose e-mail addresses matches the ones
registered in the machine.
BACK
13 If you selected <01 SUBADDRESS> or <02 SENDER’S FAX
NO.> in step 12, press [BACK] repeatedly to return to the
SETUP FULE menu.
7
F3
F4
14 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <04 RX PASSWORD> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The display for entering the RX password appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
15 Enter an RX password (up to 20 digits) using the numeric keys
➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the SETUP FILE menu.
NOTE
The RX password can be up to 20 digits long, and can include *, #, and spaces.
Setting Up Your Machine as a Relay Unit
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-9
F3
F4
16 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <05 SELECT ORIG
UNIT> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The SELECT ORIG UNIT menu appears.
F3
F4
17 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 OFF> or <02 ON>.
● If you selected <01 OFF>:
OK
❑ Press [OK].
The display returns to the SETUP FILE menu.
● If you selected <02 ON>:
7
❑ Specify the sender’s fax number using one-touch or coded speed dialing ➞
01
63
press [OK].
Coded
Dial
OK
The display returns to the SETUP FILE menu.
F3
18 If you want to print a list of transactions for the relay unit,
press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <06 PRINT RX DOC.> ➞
press [OK].
F4
OK
The PRINT RX DOC. menu appears.
Setting Up Your Machine as a Relay Unit
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F3
F4
19 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 OFF> or <02 ON>.
● If you selected <01 OFF>:
OK
❑ Press [OK].
The display returns to the SETUP FILE menu.
● If you selected <02 ON>:
OK
F2
❑ Press [OK] ➞ press [F2] (-) or [F3] (+) to enter the number of copies (from 01
to 99) ➞ press [OK].
You can also use the numeric keys to enter the number of copies.
F3
OK
The display returns to the SETUP FILE menu.
7
F3
20 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <07 SELECT
LOCATIONS> ➞ press [OK].
F4
OK
The display for registering select locations for the relay broadcast appears.
Setting Up Your Machine as a Relay Unit
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-11
01
63
21 Specify the destinations registered under one-touch speed
dialing keys or coded speed dialing codes ➞ press [OK].
Coded
Dial
OK
The display returns to the SETUP FILE menu.
NOTE
You can specify up to 200 destinations.
F3
F4
22 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <08 TX REPORT> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The TX REPORT menu appears.
7
F3
F4
23 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 DO NOTTRANSMIT>
or <02 TRANSMIT> ➞ press [OK].
<01 DO NOT TRANSMIT>: No relay transmission report is sent to the originator
after a document has been relayed.
OK
<02 TRANSMIT>: After your machine relays a document, it sends a transmission
report back to the originator. In order for this feature to perform correctly, the
originator’s telephone number must be registered on your machine for one-touch
or coded speed dialing.
The display returns to the SETUP FILE menu.
Setting Up Your Machine as a Relay Unit
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F3
F4
24 If you want to set a preset time for your documents to be
relayed, press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <09 TX START
TIME> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The TX START TIME menu appears.
F3
F4
25 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight a preset time number
(from 01 to 05) ➞ press [OK].
You can set up to five times every day for the machine to relay documents.
OK
The display for entering the TX start time appears.
7
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
26 Enter the time to start the relay broadcast in 24-hour notation
(e.g. 1:00 p.m. as 13:00) using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The message <DATA ENTRY OK> appears on the screen for about two seconds,
and the display returns to the TX start time menu.
BACK
27 To continue setting theTX start time, repeat steps 25 and 26 ➞
when you are finished setting the TX start times, press
[BACK].
The display returns to the SETUP FILE menu.
Setting Up Your Machine as a Relay Unit
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-13
F3
F4
28 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight the <10 RELAY B'CAST>
➞ press [OK].
OK
The RELAY B'CAST menu appears.
F3
F4
29 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 ON> or <02 OFF> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The display for entering another relay TX group number appears.
30 To continue creating another relay TX group, repeat the
procedure from step 6.
7
Reset
31 Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Setting Up Your Machine as a Relay Unit
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing Relay Group Settings
Additional Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
OK
F3
F4
2
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <06 FILE SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The FILE SETTINGS menu appears.
7
F3
F4
3
4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 RELAY TX GROUP>
➞ press [OK].
OK
The RELAY TX GROUP menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 CHANGE DATA> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The display for entering the relay TX group number appears.
Setting Up Your Machine as a Relay Unit
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-15
F2
F3
5
6
Press [F2] (-) or [F3] (+) to enter the number of the relay TX
group number whose settings you want to change ➞ press
[OK].
OK
You can also use the numeric keys to enter the relay TX group number.
If the message <ENTER AN ID NUMBER> is displayed, proceed to step 6.
If a password has not been set for the relay TX group you selected, the CHANGE
DATA menu appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
If the message <ENTER AN ID NUMBER> is displayed, enter
the password for the relay group using the numeric keys ➞
press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
7
The CHANGE DATA menu appears.
7
8
Change the desired relay TX group settings.
For details about the settings you can select and how to change them, refer to
Reset
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Setting Up Your Machine as a Relay Unit
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-16
Deleting a Relay Group
Additional Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
OK
F3
F4
2
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <06 FILE SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The FILE SETTINGS menu appears.
7
F3
F4
3
4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 RELAYTX GROUP>
➞ press [OK].
OK
The RELAY TX GROUP menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 DELETE FILE> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The display for entering the relay group number appears.
Setting Up Your Machine as a Relay Unit
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-17
F2
F3
5
Press [F2] (-) or [F3] (+) to enter the number of the relay group
you want to delete ➞ press [OK].
You can also use the numeric keys to enter the relay TX group number.
OK
If a password has not been set for the relay group you selected, the selected relay
group is deleted.
If the message <ENTER AN ID NUMBER> is displayed, proceed to step 6.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
6
7
If the message <ENTER AN ID NUMBER> is displayed, enter
the relay TX group password using the numeric keys ➞ press
[OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
7
The message <FILE DELETED> appears on the screen for about two seconds,
and the selected relay group is deleted.
Reset
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Setting Up Your Machine as a Relay Unit
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-18
Using Relay Broadcasting
Follow this procedure to use relay broadcasting.
1
2
3
Create a memory box for relay broadcasting on your machine.
For details on this procedure, see “Creating a Relay Group,” on p. 7-5.
Tell the originator machine the ITU-T subaddress and
password of your relay box.
Have the originator unit send a document to your relay box.
When your machine receives a document in its relay box, it relays the document
to the other registered fax machines.
NOTE
7
•
•
•
You can select to print the relay document your machine receives from the
If you have preset the time to start relay broadcasting, the machine starts sending
the document to the other fax machines at the preset time.
The relay document in the relay box is deleted from memory automatically after it is
sent.
Using Relay Broadcasting
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-19
Sending a Document to a Relay Unit for Relay
Broadcasting
Follow this procedure to send a document to a relay unit.
NOTE
In this procedure, your machine is the originator.
■ Before Sending a Document to Another Machine for Relay Broadcasting
Confirm the following points on your machine:
• Make sure your machine’s fax/telephone number is correctly registered. (See
• Enter a subaddress.
Contact the other party, and confirm the following points about their machine:
• The relay unit must support ITU-T subaddress/password transactions.
• If you want a relay transmission report sent back to your machine from the relay unit,
instruct the other party to turn this feature ‘ON’ when they set up the relay function on
their machine.
• Make sure the relay unit has registered the telephone numbers of all destinations under
speed dialing keys.
7
• Make sure you have the correct subaddress for the other party’s machine.
• Confirm that the subaddress you have been given has been used to set up the other
party’s fax machine as a relay station.Your machine cannot confirm whether the other
party’s fax machine has been set up properly as a relay unit.
• If an ITU-T password is set on the other party’s machine, you must send the document
with the same ITU-T password. Otherwise, the other machine cannot receive your
document.
After the relay machine is set up to participate in a relay network, it should receive and
relay documents automatically. By following the initial setup procedures in the previous
section, the relay fax machine can be set to confirm the identity of the originator before
sending, and to send a relay transmission report to the originator after your machine
relays the document.
NOTE
If your machine is the originator of a relay transmission using this method, it does not
check to ensure that the machine to receive and relay the transmission is set up properly
for relay transmission. Even if the machine is not set up to relay your documents, your
machine reports such a transmission as a successful relay transmission. Make sure the
relay unit is set up correctly to relay the documents it receives from your machine.
Sending a Document to a Relay Unit for Relay Broadcasting
7-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending a Document to a Relay Unit with Speed Dialing
You can register a telephone number for relay sending under a one-touch speed
dialing key or a coded speed dialing code.
Check these points before you send a document to another party for relay
broadcasting:
• Contact the other party and ask for the ITU-T subaddress and password they are
using for receiving documents they are to relay.
• The other party’s fax machine does not have to be a Canon fax machine, but make
sure the other party’s fax machine supports the use of ITU-T subaddresses and
passwords.
• Perform the procedure to register a telephone number for one-touch or coded
• If the speed dialing keys are already set up, perform the procedure to change the
• When you set up the speed dialing settings, turn ‘ON’ the OPTIONAL SETTINGS
feature, and select <03 TX TYPE>. Select <03 ORIG RELAY TX>, and set the
7
• Confirm that the other party is set up properly to relay documents received from
your machine.Your machine cannot confirm whether the other party’s machine
has been set up properly for relaying a document sent from your machine.
Sending with the Advanced Communication Key
Follow the procedure below to send a document for a relay broadcast with the
Advanced Communication key.
NOTE
You can set only one destination.
1
2
Press [FAX].
FAX
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
Place your documents on the machine.
Sending a Document to a Relay Unit for Relay Broadcasting
7-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE
•
•
You can also specify a sender’s name with
(TTI Selector). (See “Sending a
3
4
Open all three one-touch speed dialing panels ➞ press
[Advanced Communication].
Advanced
Communication
The ADVANCED COMM. menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 RELAY> ➞ press
[OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
7
The Fax Basic Features screen appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
5
Dial the telephone number of the relay unit using the numeric
keys➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
OK
If you use the numeric keys to specify the destination, be sure to press
(OK) at the end of the number.
Sending a Document to a Relay Unit for Relay Broadcasting
7-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The display for entering the subaddress appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
6
Enter the ITU-T subaddress required to start the relay
broadcast on the other party’s fax machine using the numeric
keys ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.
NOTE
•
•
The subaddress can be up to 20 digits long, and can include *, #, and spaces.
The subaddress (and any spaces in it) must be exactly the same as the other
party’s subaddress.
•
•
To enter a space, press
(Space).
If you enter a wrong number, use the curser keys to go back to the position you
want to correct
➞
press
(Delete)
➞
enter the correct number.
F4
•
To delete the entire entry, press
(DELETE) or (Clear).
7
7
If an ITU-T password is required to start the relay broadcast,
press [Advanced Communication].
Advanced
Communication
Otherwise, proceed to step 10.
NOTE
•
You must press
(Advanced Communication) within five seconds of entering
the subaddress. If you wait longer than the timeout interval, the machine starts to
scan your documents.
•
Sending a Document to a Relay Unit for Relay Broadcasting
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-23
F3
F4
8
9
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <05 PASSWORD>
➞ press [OK].
OK
The display for entering the password appears.
\
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Enter the ITU-T password using the numeric keys ➞ press
[OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.
NOTE
•
•
The password can be up to 20 digits long, and can include *, #, and spaces.
The password (and any spaces in it) must be exactly the same as the other party’s
password.
7
•
•
To enter a space, press
(Space).
If you enter a wrong number, use the cursor keys to go back to the position you
want to correct ➞ press
(Delete) ➞ enter the correct number.
F4
•
To delete the entire entry, press
(DELETE) or
(Clear).
Start
10 Press [Start].
Scanning starts.
The machine starts to scan the documents, dials the number, and sends the
documents with the subaddress and password you just entered.
NOTE
F3
•
To cancel the transmission, press
(Stop)
➞
(YES) when you are
prompted to confirm the cancellation.
•
When the machine dials the fax numbers, the numbers that have a subaddress/
password registered to a one-touch speed dialing key or coded speed dialing code
take priority.
Sending a Document to a Relay Unit for Relay Broadcasting
7-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Confidential Mailboxes
8
CHAPTER
This chapter shows you how to send and receive confidential documents.
A confidential document is a document that does not print as soon as it is received. The
receiving party must use a password to unlock his or her mailbox in order to print the
document. Confidential sending and receiving are used for documents that you want only the
person with the correct password to read.
What Is a Confidential Mailbox? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Setting Up a Confidential Mailbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Confidential Mailbox Setting Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Creating a Confidential Mailbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Using a Confidential Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Receiving a Confidential Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Sending a Confidential Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Sending a Confidential Document with Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Is a Confidential Mailbox?
A confidential mailbox is a memory box used to receive confidential documents. A
confidential document is not printed as soon as it is received. The other party who
sends a document to your confidential mailbox must know the ITU-T subaddress
and password set for your confidential mailbox. The receiving party must use a
password to unlock his or her mailbox in order to print the document.
Confidential Memory Box
Enter the password, and
The subaddress and RX password are set, and the
print the document.
documents are sent to the Confidential Memory Box.
NOTE
To use a confidential mailbox, you have to create your confidential mailbox first, and let
the other party know its ITU-T subaddress and password. Setting the password for the
8
What Is a Confidential Mailbox?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-2
Setting Up a Confidential Mailbox
In this section we will describe how to create your own confidential mailbox, change
the mailbox settings when necessary, and delete the mailbox when it is no longer
needed.
Confidential Mailbox Setting Table
A confidential mailbox is for reception only, which enables you to limit the users.
This feature is convenient when you want to receive confidential documents. A
confidential document does not print unless you enter the registered password.
The following settings can be set up for a confidential mailbox:
Item
Description
Setting
Up to 24 letters
and numbers
01 FILE NAME
Specify a name for the confidential mailbox.
Sets up the password that protects the settings of the
confidential mailbox. The password protects the
confidential mailbox settings from unauthorized
02 PASSWORD
access. If you open this confidential mailbox to view or Up to 7 digits
make changes, you have to enter this password.You
also have to enter this password to print a document
received in the confidential mailbox.
8
Sets up the ITU-T subaddress.The sending party must
Up to 20 letters
03 SUBADDRESS
04 RX PASSWORD
enter the correct ITU-T subaddress to send documents
and numbers
to your confidential mailbox. This setting is required.
Sets up the ITU-T password of the confidential
mailbox. This setting is optional. However, if you set an
Up to 20 letters
ITU-T password for your confidential mailbox, the
and numbers
sending party must enter the correct password to send
documents to your confidential mailbox.
Usually, only one copy of a document received in a
confidential mailbox is printed. If you want to print more Up to 99 copies
copies, change this setting.
05 # OF RX COPIES
IMPORTANT
Be sure not to forget your password, and store it in a safe place.
Setting Up a Confidential Mailbox
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-3
NOTE
•
If you enter a wrong number or letter, use the cursor keys to go back to the position you
want to correct ➞ press
(Delete) ➞ enter the correct number or letter.
•
To delete the entire entry, press
(Clear).
Creating a Confidential Mailbox
Follow this procedure to create a private mailbox to hold confidential documents
protected with a password.
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions].
The ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
8
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <06 FILE SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The FILE SETTINGS menu appears.
Setting Up a Confidential Mailbox
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-4
F3
F4
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 CONFIDNTL
MAILBOX> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The CONFIDNTL MAILBOX menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 SETUP FILE> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The display for entering the desired mailbox number appears.
NOTE
If you want to stop creating the confidential mailbox, press
(Stop). If you want
to restart creating it, select <02 CHANGE DATA>, and continue to set the mailbox.
F2
F3
6
Press [F2] (-) or [F3] (+) to enter the number of mailbox (from
00 to 99) ➞ press [OK].
8
You can also use the numeric keys to enter the confidential mailbox number.
OK
The SETUP FILE menu appears.
Setting Up a Confidential Mailbox
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-5
F3
F4
7
8
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 FILE NAME> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The display for entering a name for the confidential mailbox appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Enter a name for the confidential mailbox (up to 24 characters)
using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The message <DATA ENTRY OK> appears on the screen for about two seconds,
and the display returns to the SETUP FILE menu.
NOTE
•
For details about entering letters, see Chapter 2, “Basic Operations,” in the
Reference Guide.
•
The name can be up to 24 characters long, and may include numbers, symbols,
and spaces.
8
F3
F4
9
If you want to set up a password for your mailbox, press [F3]
(▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 PASSWORD> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The display for entering a password appears.
Setting Up a Confidential Mailbox
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-6
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
10 Enter a password (up to seven digits) using the numeric keys
➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the SETUP FILE menu.
IMPORTANT
You cannot set a password starting with a zero.
F3
F4
11 To set a subaddress, press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03
SUBADDRESS> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The display for entering an ITU-T subaddress appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
12 Enter an ITU-T subaddress (up to 20 digits) using the numeric
keys ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
8
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the SETUP FILE menu.
NOTE
The subaddress can be up to 20 digits long, and can include *, #, and spaces.
Setting Up a Confidential Mailbox
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-7
F3
F4
13 To set a reception password, press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <04 RX PASSWORD> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The display for entering an RX password appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
14 Enter an RX password (up to 20 digits) using the numeric keys
➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the SETUP FILE menu.
NOTE
The RX password can be up to 20 digits long, and can include *, #, and spaces.
F3
F4
15 If you want to set the number of copies for the received
documents in your mailbox, press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <05 # OF RX COPIES> ➞ press [OK].
8
OK
The display for entering the number of RX copies appears.
F2
F3
16 Press [F2] (-) or [F3] (+) to enter the number of copies (from 01
to 99) ➞ press [OK].
You can also use the numeric keys to enter the number of copies.
OK
Setting Up a Confidential Mailbox
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-8
The display for entering another mailbox number appears.
17 To continue creating another mailbox, repeat the procedure
from step 6.
Reset
18 Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Changing Confidential Mailbox Settings
Additional Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
OK
F3
F4
2
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <06 FILE SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
8
The FILE SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 CONFIDNTL
MAILBOX> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The CONFIDNTL MAILBOX menu appears.
Setting Up a Confidential Mailbox
8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F3
F4
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 CHANGE DATA> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The display for entering the confidential mailbox number appears.
F2
F3
Press [F2] (-) or [F3] (+) to enter the number of confidential
mailbox whose settings you want to change ➞ press [OK].
You can also use the numeric keys to enter the confidential mailbox number.
OK
If the message <ENTER AN ID NUMBER> is displayed, proceed to step 6.
If a password has not been set for the confidential mailbox you selected, the
CHANGE DATA menu appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
6
7
If the message <ENTER AN ID NUMBER> is displayed, enter
the password for the confidential mailbox using the numeric
keys ➞ press [OK].
8
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The CHANGE DATA menu appears.
Change the desired mailbox settings.
For details about the settings you can select and how to change them, refer to
Setting Up a Confidential Mailbox
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-10
Reset
8
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Deleting a Confidential Mailbox
Additional Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
OK
F3
F4
2
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <06 FILE SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The FILE SETTINGS menu appears.
8
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 CONFIDNTL
MAILBOX> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The CONFIDNTL MAILBOX menu appears.
Setting Up a Confidential Mailbox
8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F3
F4
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 DELETE FILE> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The display for entering the confidential mailbox number appears.
F2
F3
Press [F2] (-) or [F3] (+) to enter the number of confidential
mailbox you want to delete ➞ press [OK].
You can also use the numeric keys to enter the number.
OK
If the message <ENTER AN ID NUMBER> is displayed, proceed to step 6.
If a password has not been set for the confidential mailbox you selected, the
selected mailbox is automatically deleted.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
8
6
7
If the message <ENTER AN ID NUMBER> is displayed, enter
the confidential mailbox password using the numeric keys ➞
press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The message <FILE DELETED> appears on the screen for about two seconds,
and the selected mailbox is deleted.
Reset
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Setting Up a Confidential Mailbox
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-12
Using a Confidential Mailbox
Follow this procedure to receive confidential documents.
1
2
3
Create a confidential mailbox on your machine.
For details on this procedure, see “Creating a Confidential Mailbox,” on p. 8-4.
Tell the other party the ITU-T subaddress and password of
your confidential mailbox.
Have the other party send a document to your confidential
mailbox.
NOTE
•
When your machine receives a document in a confidential mailbox, you can set the
•
Printing of the confidential RX report every time you receive a confidential
document can be turned ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’. The default setting is ‘OFF’. (See
8
4
Enter the password to print the document received in your
confidential mailbox.
A document received in your confidential mailbox is not deleted after you print it.
If you want to delete a document in your confidential mailbox, follow the
Using a Confidential Mailbox
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-13
Receiving a Confidential Document
When the machine receives a confidential document with a subaddress or
subaddress and password that matches the subaddress/password settings for your
confidential mailbox, the document is stored inside the mailbox.
After the machine receives a document in your confidential mailbox, it displays a
message <RECEIVED IN MAILBOX> and prints a confidential RX report unless
this feature has been turned ‘OFF’.
• The confidential RX report lists the subaddress where the documents have been
received.
• Printing the confidential RX report every time you receive a confidential document
Follow this procedure to print a document received in a confidential mailbox.
1
2
Press [FAX].
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
FAX
8
Open all three one-touch speed dialing panels ➞ press
[Advanced Communication].
Advanced
Communication
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 CONFIDENTIAL> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
Receiving a Confidential Document
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-14
The CONFID. TX/RX menu appears.
F3
F4
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 CONFIDENTIAL RX>
➞ press [OK].
OK
The Fax Basic Features screen appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Enter the subaddress for the mailbox using the numeric keys
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
➞ press [OK].
F2
F3
You can also press
(-) or
(+) to enter the subaddress.
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
6
Enter the four-digit password to open the mailbox using the
numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
8
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The document starts printing.
NOTE
To protect your password, it is not displayed when you enter it.
Receiving a Confidential Document
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-15
Sending a Confidential Document
Sending a document with a subaddress and password does not ensure that the
document will be received as a confidential document. Before your machine sends
a document, it cannot confirm that the other party has their machine set up for
confidential receiving.
You can use two methods to send a confidential document:
• If you frequently use the confidential sending feature, you can register a telephone
number for confidential sending under a one-touch speed dialing key or a coded
speed dialing code.
• You can also enter the ITU-T subaddress and password by pressing [Advanced
Communication].
Sending a Confidential Document with Speed Dialing
You can register a telephone number for confidential sending under a one-touch
speed dialing key or by pressing [Coded Dial] followed by a three digit code.
Check these points before you send a confidential document to another party:
• Contact the other party and ask for the ITU-T subaddress and password they are
using for receiving confidential documents.
8
• The other party’s fax machine does not have to be a Canon fax machine, but make
sure the other party’s fax machine supports the use of ITU-T subaddresses and
passwords.
• Perform the procedure to register a telephone number for one-touch or coded
• If the speed dialing keys are already set up, perform the procedure to change the
• When you set up the speed dialing settings, turn ‘ON’ the OPTIONAL SETTINGS
feature, and select <03 TX TYPE>. Select <02 CONFIDENTIAL TX>, and set the
• Confirm that the other party has set up a confidential mailbox with the subaddress
you have been given.You must send your document with the correct subaddress,
or the other party will not receive your document in their confidential mailbox.
Sending a Confidential Document
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-16
Sending a Confidential Document with the Advanced
Communication Key
Note these points about sending a confidential document to a confidential mailbox.
• You can dial only one telephone number.
• If you frequently need to send a confidential document to more than one location,
register the number, subaddress, and password under one-touch speed dialing
keys or coded speed dialing codes so you can use sequential broadcasting. (See
• If you use one-touch or coded speed dialing to dial the number after you perform
the following operation, the transmission mode settings registered for the one-
touch speed dialing key or coded speed dialing code are ignored.
• The password setting is optional but required if the other party has set a password
on their fax machine.
Follow the procedure below to send a document for a confidential mailbox with the
Advanced Communication key.
1
2
Press [FAX].
FAX
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
8
Place your documents on the machine.
NOTE
•
•
You can also specify a sender’s name with
(TTI Selector). (See “Sending a
3
Open all three one-touch speed dialing panels ➞ press
[Advanced Communication].
Advanced
Communication
Sending a Confidential Document
8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F3
F4
4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 CONFIDENTIAL> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The CONFID. TX.RX menu appears.
F3
F4
5
6
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 CONFIDENTIALTX>
➞ press [OK].
OK
The CONFID. TX.RX menu appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Specify the destination using the numeric keys➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
8
OPER
SYMBOLS
OK
If you use the numeric keys to specify the destination, be sure to press
(OK) at the end of the number.
The display for entering the subaddress appears.
Sending a Confidential Document
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-18
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
7
Enter the ITU-T subaddress required to start sending the
confidential documents on the other party’s fax machine
using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.
NOTE
•
•
The subaddress can be up to 20 digits long, and can include *, #, and spaces.
The subaddress (and any spaces in it) must be exactly the same as the other
party’s subaddress.
•
•
To enter a space, press
If you enter a wrong number, use the curser keys to go back to the position you
want to correct press (Delete) enter the correct number.
To delete the entire entry, press (DELETE) or (Clear).
(Space).
➞
➞
F4
•
8
9
If an ITU-T password is required to start sending the
confidential documents, press [Advanced Communication].
Advanced
Communication
Otherwise, proceed to step 9.
8
NOTE
•
You must press
(Advanced Communication) within five seconds of entering
the subaddress. If you wait longer than the timeout interval, the machine starts to
scan your documents.
•
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <05 PASSWORD>
➞ press [OK].
OK
The display for entering the password appears.
Sending a Confidential Document
8-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
\
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
10 Enter the ITU-T password using the numeric keys ➞ press
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
[OK].
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.
NOTE
•
•
The password can be up to 20 digits long, and can include *, #, and spaces.
The password (and any spaces in it) must be exactly the same as the other party’s
password.
•
•
To enter a space, press
(Space).
If you enter a wrong number, use the cursor keys to go back to the position you
want to correct ➞ press
(Delete) ➞ enter the correct number.
F4
•
To delete the entire entry, press
(DELETE) or
(Clear).
Start
11 Press [Start].
Scanning starts.
The machine starts to scan the documents, dials the number, and sends the
documents with the subaddress and password you just entered.
8
NOTE
F3
•
To cancel the transmission, press
(Stop)
➞
(YES) when you are
prompted to confirm the cancellation.
•
When the machine dials the fax numbers, the numbers that have a subaddress/
password registered to a one-touch speed dialing key or coded speed dialing code
take priority.
Sending a Confidential Document
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-20
Using Polling
9
CHAPTER
This chapter describes how to set up and use polling sending and receiving. Polling is useful
when one or both parties cannot be in the office at the same time.
What Is Polling? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Polling Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
Setting Up the ITU-T Subaddress and Password for Polling Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
Polling Receiving with a Subaddress/Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Polling to Receive at a Preset Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Preset Time Polling Box Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Polling Sending. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Polling Box Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Creating a Polling Box for Sending Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Using a Polling Box for Sending Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
9-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Is Polling?
Polling is when one fax machine calls another fax machine and requests that the
other fax machine send a document that it is holding. Unlike normal sending and
receiving, in polling, the receiver always calls the sender. This is called polling to
receive a document. The sender sends the document in response to a polling
request by a telephone call from the receiver.
You can set up a polling box in your machine and store documents in it so that other
fax machines can call you, and request to send the document in your polling box.
Example of Polling Sending
Stored
Documents
Fax Machine A
This Machine
Fax Machine B
Fax Machine C
Polling Box
IMPORTANT
To use polling, you have to create a polling box first, and let the other party know its ITU-
T subaddress and password. Setting the password for the polling box is optional. Also, if
9
NOTE
•
If you want to receive a document stored in another party’s fax machine, make a polling
•
If you want to create a polling box with an ITU-T subaddress and password, be sure to
set the polling box number other than “00.”
What Is Polling?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-2
Before You Use Polling Receiving
Before you try to set up polling, note the following points:
• In one operation you can poll several fax machines.You can dial up to 210
telephone numbers, and poll those fax machines to receive documents that they
are holding.
• You can poll a machine at any time, but you may find it more useful to set your
• You must know if the other fax machine is holding the document under both a
subaddress and password, or only a subaddress or password.You must also
know the subaddress and password so you can enter them on your machine. If
you do not know the subaddress or password, contact the other party.
• If the other party’s document(s) are registered for polling without a subaddress or
password, you can still perform polling receiving.
• If the other party’s fax machine does not support ITU-T subaddress/password
transactions, you can ask them to set the polling ID to ‘255’ or ‘1111 1111’ binary if
the other party’s fax machine is a Canon fax machine.
9
What Is Polling?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-3
Polling Receiving
Polling receiving enables your machine to call another fax machine, and request it
to send the document it is holding.
NOTE
•
•
This machine can poll all fax machines that support ITU-T subaddress/password
transactions, and also Canon fax machines that do not support ITU-T subaddress/
password transactions.
If the other party’s fax machine supports ITU-T subaddress/password transactions, you
can receive the documents held in a specified polling box of the other party. To receive
the document, specify a polling box with its ITU-T subaddress.You must know the
subaddress so that you can enter it on your machine to poll the other party’s fax machine.
If the other party’s polling box has a password, you need to enter the password as well.
•
If the other party’s fax machine is a Canon fax machine and does not support ITU-T
subaddress/password transactions, you can ask them to set the polling ID to ‘255’ or
‘1111 1111’ binary.
•
•
Unless the other party has set a document on the fax machine, or stored it in a polling
box, you cannot perform polling receiving.
You can set the machine to poll other fax machines periodically at a preset time by
1
Press [FAX].
FAX
9
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
FAX
2
Open all three one-touch speed dialing panels ➞ press
[Advanced Communication].
Advanced
Communication
The ADVANCED COMM. menu appears.
Polling Receiving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-4
F3
F4
3
4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 POLLING> ➞ press
[OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The POLLING menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 POLLING RX> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.
NOTE
OK
5
Specify the destination ➞ press [OK].
9
If you use the numeric keys to specify the destinaion, be sure to press
(OK) at the end of the number.
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Polling Receiving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-5
NOTE
•
In one operation, you can poll several fax machines.You can dial up to 210
telephone numbers and poll those fax machines in order to receive documents that
they are holding.
•
You must perform the next operation within five seconds of specifying the
destination. If you wait longer than the timeout interval, the machine starts dialing
automatically, and you cannot specify the ITU-T subaddress and password. The
•
If the other party has set the ITU-T subaddress and password, you need to enter
the same ITU-T subaddress/password in order for your machine to receive their
Start
6
Press [Start].
The machine starts dialing the other party to poll and receive the document.
NOTE
To cancel polling receiving, press
TX/RX?> is displayed, press
(Stop). If the message <CANCEL DURING
(YES).
F3
Setting Up the ITU-T Subaddress and Password for Polling
Receiving
To receive a document held under an ITU-T subaddress and password, you have to
specify them after dialing the other party’s fax number.
9
Advanced
Communication
1
After entering the fax number of the party you want to poll,
press [Advanced Communication].
The ADVANCED COMM. menu appears.
NOTE
You must press
(Advanced Communication) within five seconds of entering
the fax number. If you wait longer than the interval, the machine starts to poll and
receive the documents. The timeout interval can be turned ‘OFF’. (See “Time Out
Polling Receiving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-6
F3
F4
2
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <04 SUBADDRESS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Enter the ITU-T subaddress (up to 20 digits) using the numeric
keys ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.
NOTE
•
•
The subaddress can be up to 20 digits long, and can include *, #, and spaces.
The subaddress (and any spaces in it) must be exactly the same as the other
party’s subaddress.
•
•
To enter a space, press
(Space).
If you enter a wrong number, use the cursor keys to go back to the position you
want to correct ➞ press
(Delete) ➞ enter the correct number.
F4
9
•
To delete the entire entry, press
(DELETE) or
(Clear).
4
5
If an ITU-T password is required, proceed to step 5.
If a password is not required, press
(Start).
The machine starts polling receiving.
Advanced
Communication
Press [Advanced Communication].
The ADVANCED COMM. menu appears.
Polling Receiving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-7
NOTE
You must press
(Advanced Communication) within five seconds of entering
the subaddress. If you wait longer than five seconds, the machine starts to poll and
receive the documents. The timeout interval can be turned ‘OFF’. (See “Time Out
F3
F4
6
7
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <05 PASSWORD> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The display for entering the ITU-T password appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Enter the ITU-T password (up to 20 digits) using the numeric
keys ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.
NOTE
•
•
The password can be up to 20 digits long, and can include *, #, and spaces.
9
The password (and any spaces in it) must be exactly the same as the other party’s
password.
•
•
To enter a space, press
(Space).
If you enter a wrong number, use the cursor keys to go back to the position you
want to correct ➞ press
(Delete) ➞ enter the correct number.
F4
•
To delete the entire entry, press
(DELETE) or
(Clear).
Start
8
Press [Start].
The machine starts polling receiving.
Polling Receiving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-8
Polling Receiving with a Subaddress/Password
If the other party’s document is registered for polling with a subaddress and
password, you need to specify them to perform polling receiving. It is possible that
the password is not set, however.You need to be sure of the subaddress/password
setting of the other party’s fax.
Advanced
Communication
1
Specify the destination of the party you are polling ➞ press
[Advanced Communication].
The ADVANCED COMM. menu appears.
NOTE
You must press
(Advanced Communication) within five seconds of entering
the fax number. If you wait longer than five seconds, the machine starts to poll and
receive the documents. The timeout interval can be turned ‘OFF’. (See “Time Out
F3
F4
2
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <04 SUBADDRESS> ➞
press [OK].
9
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The menu for entering the subaddress appears.
Polling Receiving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-9
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
3
Enter the ITU-T subaddress (up to 20 digits) using the numeric
keys ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.
NOTE
•
•
The subaddress can be up to 20 digits long, and can include *, #, and spaces.
The subaddress (and any spaces in it) must be exactly the same as the other
party’s subaddress.
•
•
To enter a space, press
(Space).
If you enter a wrong number, use the cursor keys to go back to the position you
want to correct ➞ press
(Delete) ➞ enter the correct number.
F4
•
•
To delete the entire entry, press
(DELETE) or
(Clear).
If the other party has not set a password, proceed to step 7.
4
5
Open all three one-touch speed dialing panels ➞ press
[Advanced Communication].
Advanced
Communication
The ADVANCED COMM. menu appears.
9
NOTE
You must press
(Advanced Communication) within five seconds of entering
the subaddress. If you wait longer than five seconds, the machine starts to poll and
receive the documents. The timeout interval can be turned ‘OFF’. (See “Time Out
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <05 PASSWORD> ➞
press [OK].
OK
Polling Receiving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-10
The display for entering the ITU-T password appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
6
Enter the ITU-T password (up to 20 digits) using the numeric
keys ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.
NOTE
•
•
The password can be up to 20 digits long, and can include *, #, and spaces.
The password (and any spaces in it) must be exactly the same as the other party’s
password.
•
•
To enter a space, press
(Space).
If you enter a wrong number, use the cursor keys to go back to the position you
want to correct ➞ press
(Delete) ➞ enter the correct number.
F4
•
To delete the entire entry, press
(DELETE) or
(Clear).
Start
7
Press [Start].
The machine starts polling receiving.
9
Polling Receiving
9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Polling to Receive at a Preset Time
Before you set up polling at a preset time, make sure you have performed the
following tasks:
• Register the numbers of the fax machines you want to poll under one-touch speed
dialing keys or coded speed dialing codes.
• When you set up the speed dialing settings, turn ‘ON’ the OPTIONAL SETTINGS
and select ‘TX TYPE’. Select ‘POLLING RX’, and set the ITU-T subaddress and
• If you have to poll a number that you use regularly, you should register it under
another speed dialing key. Set the ITU-T subaddress and password to match the
polling box of the other party’s fax machine, and register the second number for
preset polling.
Preset Time Polling Box Settings Table
Follow this procedure to set the machine to poll another fax machine at a preset time.
Polling at a preset time, enables you to conduct document transactions later at night
when the telephone rates are lower.
You can set the following settings for a preset time polling box:
9
Item
Description
Setting
Up to 24 letters
and numbers
01 FILE NAME
Sets up the name of the preset polling.
Sets up the password that protects the settings of the
preset polling box. If you open this polling box to view or
make changes, you have to enter this password.You
also have to enter this password to print a document
received in the polling box.
02 PASSWORD
Up to seven digits
Selects the locations of the fax machines you want to
poll, using speed dialing.
Up to 200
destinations
03 SELECT LOCATIONS
04 START TIME
Up to five times
every day or on
select day of the
week.
Sets the time that you want to start polling receiving.
Polling to Receive at a Preset Time
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-12
NOTE
•
If you made a mistake when entering the file name, password, or destination, use the
cursor keys to go back to the position you want to correct ➞ press
(Delete) ➞ enter
the correct value.
•
•
To delete the entire entry, press
(Clear).
If you made a mistake entering the transfer start time, use the cursor keys to go back to
the digit you want to correct ➞ enter the correct digit.
•
To delete the entire entry, press
(Clear).
Creating a Preset Time Polling Box
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions].
The ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
9
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <06 FILE SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The FILE SETTINGS menu appears.
Polling to Receive at a Preset Time
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-13
F3
F4
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 PRESET POLLING>
➞ press [OK].
OK
The PRESET POLLING menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 SETUP FILE> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The display for entering the preset polling box number appears.
NOTE
If you want to stop creating the preset polling box, press
(Stop). If you want to
restart creating it, select <02 CHANGE DATA>, and continue the polling box
setting.
F2
F3
6
7
Press [F2] (-) or [F3] (+) to select a preset polling box number
(from 00 to 99) ➞ press [OK].
9
You can also use the numeric keys to enter the preset polling box number.
OK
The SETUP FILE menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 FILE NAME> ➞
press [OK].
OK
Polling to Receive at a Preset Time
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-14
The display for entering a name for the preset polling box appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
8
9
Enter a name for the polling box (up to 24 characters) using
the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The message <DATA ENTRY OK> appears on the screen for about two seconds,
and the display returns to the SETUP FILE menu.
NOTE
•
For details about entering letters, see Chapter 2, ”Basic Operations,” in the
Reference Guide.
•
The name can be up to 24 characters long, and may include numbers, symbols,
and spaces.
F3
F4
If you want to set a password for this preset polling box, press
[F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 PASSWORD> ➞ press
[OK].
OK
The display for entering a password for the preset polling box appears.
9
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
10 Enter a password (up to seven digits) using the numeric keys
➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the SETUP FILE menu.
IMPORTANT
You cannot set a password starting with a zero.
Polling to Receive at a Preset Time
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-15
F3
F4
11 To specify select locations to poll, press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 SELECT LOCATIONS> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The display for specifying the destinations appears.
01
63
12 Specify the destinations that you want to poll using the speed
dialing keys ➞ press [OK].
Coded
Dial
OK
The display returns to the SETUP FILE menu.
IMPORTANT
If the fax machine you want to poll has set a subaddress/password, you have to
register the correct ITU-T subaddress/password under the speed dialing keys or
NOTE
You can enter up to 200 destinations.
9
F3
F4
13 To set a time to poll other machines to send documents, press
[F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <04 START TIME> ➞ press
[OK].
OK
The START TIME menu appears.
Polling to Receive at a Preset Time
9-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F3
F4
14 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 EVERYDAY> or <02
SELECT DAYS> ➞ press [OK].
OK
● If you select <01 EVERYDAY>:
F3
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight a number (from 01 to 05) ➞ press [OK].
You can set up to five different start times every day to poll other fax machines
for documents.
F4
OK
The display for entering the start time for polling appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
❑ Enter the start time for polling in 24-hour notation (e.g. 1:00 p.m. as 13:00)
using the numeric keys. ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PRS
7
TUV
8
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The message <DATA ENTRY OK> appears on the screen for about two
seconds, and the display for selecting the preset start time number appears.
9
● If you select <02 SELECT DAYS>:
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight a day of the week ➞ press [OK].
OK
The display for selecting the preset time number appears.
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight a number (from 01 to 05) ➞ press [OK].
You can set up to five different start times every day to poll other fax machines
for documents.
OK
Polling to Receive at a Preset Time
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-17
µ
The display for entering the start time for polling appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
❑ Enter the start time for polling in 24-hour notation (e.g. 1:00 p.m. as 13:00)
using the numeric keys. ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PRS
7
TUV
8
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The message <DATA ENTRY OK> appears on the screen for about two
seconds, and the display for selecting the preset start time number appears.
Reset
15 Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Changing Preset Time Polling Box Settings
Additional Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
9
OK
F3
F4
2
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <06 FILE SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The FILE SETTINGS menu appears.
Polling to Receive at a Preset Time
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-18
F3
F4
3
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 PRESET POLLING>
➞ press [OK].
OK
The PRESET POLLING menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 CHANGE DATA> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The display for entering the preset polling box number appears.
F2
F3
Press [F2] (-) or [F3] (+) to enter the number of the preset
polling box whose settings you want to change ➞ press [OK].
You can also use the numeric keys to enter the preset polling box number.
OK
9
If the message <ENTER AN ID NUMBER> is displayed, proceed to step 6.
If a password has not been set for the preset polling box you selected, the
CHANGE DATA menu appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
6
If the message <ENTER AN ID NUMBER> is displayed, enter
the password using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The CHANGE DATA menu appears.
Polling to Receive at a Preset Time
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-19
7
8
Change the desired preset polling box settings.
For details about the settings you can select and how to change them, refer to
Reset
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Deleting a Preset Time Polling Box
Additional Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
OK
F3
F4
2
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <06 FILE SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
9
The FILE SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 PRESET POLLING>
➞ press [OK].
OK
The PRESET POLLING menu appears.
Polling to Receive at a Preset Time
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-20
F3
F4
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 DELETE FILE> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The display for entering the preset polling box number appears.
F2
F3
Press [F2] (-) or [F3] (+) to enter the number of the preset
poling box you want to delete ➞ press [OK].
You can also use the numeric keys to enter the preset polling box number.
OK
If the message <ENTER AN ID NUMBER> is displayed, proceed to step 6.
If a password has not been set for the preset polling box you selected, the
selected preset polling box is automatically deleted.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
6
7
If the message <ENTER AN ID NUMBER> is displayed, enter
the password using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The message <FILE DELETED> appears on the screen for about two seconds,
and the selected preset polling box is deleted.
Reset
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Polling to Receive at a Preset Time
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-21
Polling Sending
This section shows you how to set up your machine to store and hold a document
until it is polled by another fax machine to send it.
Polling Box Settings Table
Before you set up your polling box, contact the parties who are going to poll your
machine to receive documents and confirm the following points:
• The other parties must know your ITU-T subaddress number.
• If you are also using an ITU-T password for the polling box, they must also know
this password. This password setting is optional.
• Your TX PASSWORD must match the ITU-T password attached when the other
party calls you. Confirm that the TX PASSWORD on your fax machine matches
the ITU-T password attached when the other party calls you.
• If the other party's fax does not support ITU-T subaddress/password transactions,
you may be able to use polling box 00.
You can set the following for a polling box:
Item
Description
Setting
Up to 24 letters
and numbers
01 FILE NAME
Sets up the name of the poling box.
9
Sets up the password that protects the settings of the
polling box. If you open this polling box to view or make
02 PASSWORD
changes, you have to enter this password.You also have Up to 7 digits
to enter this password to print a document received in
the polling box.
Sets up the ITU-T subaddress. The sending party must
Up to 20 letters
03 SUBADDRESS
enter the correct ITU-T subaddress to poll your
and numbers
machine. This setting is required.
Sets up the ITU-T password for your polling box. This
setting is optional. However, if you set an ITU-T
password for your polling box, the calling party must
enter the correct password to poll your machine.
Up to 20 letters
and numbers
04 TX PASSWORD
Tells the machine how to handle the document after it is
polled and sent.
05 ERASE AFTER TX
OFF, ON*
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
Polling Sending
9-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE
•
If you entered a wrong number or letter, use the cursor keys to go back to the position
you want to correct ➞ press
(Delete) ➞ enter the correct number or letter.
•
To delete the entire entry, press
(Clear).
Creating a Polling Box for Sending Documents
Before you can use polling sending, you must create a polling box using the File
settings menu.
The polling box holds the document in the memory until the other party polls your
machine to send the document.
Additional Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
OK
F3
F4
2
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <06 FILE SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
9
The FILE SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <04 POLLING BOX> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The POLLING BOX menu appears.
Polling Sending
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-23
F3
F4
4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 SETUP FILE> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The display for entering the polling box number appears.
NOTE
If you want to stop creating the polling box, press
(Stop). If you want to restart
creating it, select <02 CHANGE DATA>, and continue the polling box setting.
F2
F3
5
6
Press [F2] (-) or [F3] (+) to select a polling box number (from
00 to 99) ➞ press [OK].
You can also use the numeric keys to enter the polling box number.
OK
The SETUP FILE menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 FILE NAME> ➞
press [OK].
9
OK
The message <DATA ENTRY OK> appears on the screen for about two seconds,
and the display for entering a name for the polling box appears.
Polling Sending
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-24
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
7
Enter a name for the polling box (up to 24 characters) using
the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the SETUP FILE menu.
NOTE
•
For details about entering letters, see Chapter 2, “Basic Operations,” in the
Reference Guide.
•
The name can be up to 24 characters long, and may include numbers, symbols,
and spaces.
F3
F4
8
9
If you want to set a password for this polling box, press [F3]
(▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 PASSWORD> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The display for entering a password for the polling box appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Enter a password (up to seven digits) using the numeric keys
➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
9
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the SETUP FILE menu.
IMPORTANT
You cannot set a password starting with a zero.
Polling Sending
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-25
F3
F4
10 To set a subaddress for your polling box, press [F3] (▼) or
[F4] (▲) to highlight <03 SUBADDRESS> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The display for entering the subaddress appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
11 Enter an ITU-T subaddress (up to 20 digits) using the numeric
keys ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the SETUP FILE menu.
NOTE
•
•
This setting is required.
The subaddress can be up to 20 digits long, and can include *, #, and spaces.
F3
F4
12 If you want to set a TX password for polling sending, press
[F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <04 TX PASSWORD> ➞ press
[OK].
9
OK
The display for entering a TX password appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
13 Enter a TX password (up to 20 digits) using the numeric keys
➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the SETUP FILE menu.
Polling Sending
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-26
NOTE
The TX password can be up to 20 digits long, and can include *, #, and spaces.
F3
F4
14 If you want the document erased from memory after the
machine has been polled and sent the document, press [F3]
(▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <05 ERASE AFTER TX> ➞ press
[OK].
OK
The ERASE AFTER TX menu appears.
F3
F4
15 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 OFF> or <02 ON> ➞
press [OK].
<01 OFF>: The document in the polling box is not erased after it is polled.
OK
<02 ON>: The document in the polling box is erased after it is sent once in
response to a polling request by another fax machine.
9
Reset
16 Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Changing Polling Box Settings
Additional Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
OK
Polling Sending
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-27
F3
F4
2
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <06 FILE SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The FILE SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
3
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <04 POLLING BOX> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The POLLING BOX menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 CHANGE DATA> ➞
press [OK].
OK
9
The display for entering the polling box number appears.
F2
F3
Press [F2] (-) or [F3] (+) to enter the number of the polling box
whose settings you want to change ➞ press [OK].
You can also use the numeric keys to enter the polling box number.
OK
If the message <ENTER AN ID NUMBER> is displayed, proceed to step 6.
Polling Sending
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-28
If a password has not been set for the polling box you selected, the CHANGE
DATA menu appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
6
If the message <ENTER AN ID NUMBER> is displayed, enter
the password using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The CHANGE DATA menu appears.
7
8
Change the desired polling box settings.
For details about the settings you can select and how to change them, refer to
Reset
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Deleting a Polling Box
Additional Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK]
F3
F4
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
9
OK
F3
F4
2
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <06 FILE SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The FILE SETTINGS menu appears.
Polling Sending
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-29
F3
F4
3
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <04 POLLING BOX> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The POLLING BOX menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 DELETE FILE> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The display for entering the polling box number appears.
F2
F3
Press [F2] (-) or [F3] (+) to enter the number of the poling box
you want to delete ➞ press [OK].
If the you can also use the numeric keys to enter the polling box number.
OK
9
If the message <ENTER AN ID NUMBER> is displayed, proceed to step 6.
If a password has not been set for the polling box you selected, the selected box is
automatically deleted.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
6
If the message <ENTER AN ID NUMBER> is displayed, enter
the password using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The message <FILE DELETED> appears on the screen for about two seconds,
and the selected polling box is deleted.
Polling Sending
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-30
Reset
7
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
9
Polling Sending
9-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using a Polling Box for Sending Documents
1
2
Store the document to be polled into the polling box.
Have the receiving party dial the fax number of your machine,
and poll it.
The machine sends the document stored in the polling box.
NOTE
•
•
You can also create a polling box to receive documents from another party at a
9
Using a Polling Box for Sending Documents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-32
Special Fax Features
10
CHAPTER
This chapter describes some convenient features that you may want to use in daily operations.
Using Tone Dialing on a Pulse Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Program One-Touch Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Setting Up a Program One-Touch Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4
Setting the TX/RX Start Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Adjusting the Scanning Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Setting the RX Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12
Confirming the Other Party’s Fax Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-14
Changing the Fax Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-16
10-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Tone Dialing on a Pulse Line
Many telephone information services for banks, airline reservations, hotel
reservations, etc., require tone dialing for accessing their services. If your machine
is connected to a rotary pulse line, follow the procedure below to set the machine to
tone dialing temporarily.
Hook
1
2
Press [Hook] ➞ Specify the destination.
When the recorded message of the information service
answers, open all three one-touch speed dialing panels ➞
press [Tone].
Tone
To adjust the speaker volume, slide the speaker volume switch on the control
panel.
10
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
3
Use the numeric keys to enter the numbers requested by the
information service.
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
Start
4
5
If you are requested to switch the machine to the receive
mode, press [Start].
Hook
Press [Hook].
Using Tone Dialing on a Pulse Line
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-2
Program One-Touch Keys
You have to open all three one-touch speed dialing panels to access the fax
function keys. To simplify the procedure, you can assign each function related to
faxing to any one-touch speed dialing key.
This enables you to perform a routine procedure with a single press of a key.
A one-touch speed dialing key with a fax function is called a “program one-touch
key.” The program one-touch key feature cannot be used for the copy function.
NOTE
The default setting is ‘01 DO NOT USE’.
List of Available Functions
The following 12 fax functions can be assigned to the program one-touch key
feature:
Item
Description
Press before starting or sending operation. A TX result report is
printed automatically when the fax transmission finishes.
01 PRINT REPORT
Same function as opening all three one-touch speed dialing panels
and pressing [Report].
02 REPORT
Same function as opening all three one-touch speed dialing panels
and pressing [TTI Selector].
03 SENDER NAME
Same function as opening all three one-touch speed dialing panels,
pressing [Advanced Communication], and selecting
<SUBADDRESS>.
10
04 SUBADDRESS
05 DELAYED TX
06 CONFIDENTIAL
Same function as opening all three one-touch speed dialing panels
and pressing [Delayed Transmission].
Same function as opening all three one-touch speed dialing panels,
pressing [Advanced Communication], and selecting
<CONFIDENTIAL>.
Same function as opening all three one-touch speed dialing panels,
pressing [Advanced Communication], and selecting <RELAY>.
07 RELAY
Same function as opening all three one-touch speed dialing panels,
pressing [Advanced Communication], and selecting <POLLING>.
08 POLLING
Press to start the access code dialing.
09 ACCESS CODE
You can register a sender name for a program one-touch key.
10 SENDER'S NAME SET
Program One-Touch Keys
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-3
Item
11 SET TEXT
Description
Press to enter fixed text, etc.
Same function as opening all three one-touch speed dialing panels
and pressing [Memory Reference].
12 MEMORY REFERENCE
Setting Up a Program One-Touch Key
Follow the procedure below to set up a program one-touch key.
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions].
The ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
10
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 USER SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The USER SETTINGS menu appears.
Program One-Touch Keys
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-4
F3
F4
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <07 PROG. 1-TOUCH
KEY> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The PROG. 1-TOUCH KEY menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight the number of an empty
one-touch speed dialing key ➞ press [OK].
An empty one-touch speed dialing key has the message <NOT REGISTERED>
next to the one-touch speed dialing number.
OK
IMPORTANT
You cannot assign fax functions to the program one-touch speed dialing keys under
which telephone numbers are registered.
F3
F4
6
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 USE> ➞ press [OK].
If you do not want to register a function to a one-touch speed dialing key, select
<01 DO NOT USE>.
OK
10
The list of the functions that can be assigned to the program one-touch key is
displayed.
Program One-Touch Keys
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-5
F3
F4
7
8
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight the desired function ➞
press [OK].
OK
The display returns to the PROG. 1-TOUCH KEY menu.
Reset
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
10
Program One-Touch Keys
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-6
Setting the TX/RX Start Speed
If you find the telephone line in poor condition, and it takes a long time for the
machine to start a transaction, follow the procedure below to change the
transmission speed for all documents you send and receive.
NOTE
The default setting is ‘06 33600bps’ for either <TX START SPEED> and <RX START
SPEED>.
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions].
The ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
10
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 USER SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
OK
Setting the TX/RX Start Speed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-7
The USER SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
4
5
6
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 TEL LINE
SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The TEL LINE SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 TX START SPEED>
or <04 RX START SPEED> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The TX START SPEED or RX START SPEED menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight a desired start speed for
the transmission or reception ➞ press [OK].
OK
10
TX/RX start speed is registered, and the display returns to the TEL LINE
SETTINGS menu.
NOTE
If you find that the telephone line is in poor condition, select a slower TX/RX start
speed.
Reset
7
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Setting the TX/RX Start Speed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-8
Adjusting the Scanning Density
Follow the procedure below to adjust the scanning density for each density level:
dark, standard, and light.
If you often send a document that is too dark or too light, it is recommended to
adjust the scanning density.
NOTE
• Even if you change (adjust) the density, the resolution does not change.
•
If you want to send a document with a detailed image, adjust the resolution. (See
Additional Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
OK
F3
F4
2
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 USER SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
10
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The USER SETTINGS menu appears.
Adjusting the Scanning Density
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-9
F3
F4
3
4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <06 DENSITY
CONTROL> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The DENSITY CONTROL menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 LIGHT>, <02
STANDARD>, or <03 DARK> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The display for adjusting the selected density level appears.
● If you select <01 LIGHT>:
❑ Adjust the density by pressing [F2] (LIGHT) or [F3] (DARK) ➞ press [OK].
F2
F3
OK
The display returns to the DENSITY CONTROL menu.
● If you select <02 STANDARD>:
10
❑ Adjust the density by pressing [F2] (LIGHT) or [F3] (DARK) ➞ press [OK].
F2
F3
OK
The display returns to the DENSITY CONTROL menu.
Adjusting the Scanning Density
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-10
● If you select <03 DARK>:
❑ Adjust the density by pressing [F2] (LIGHT) or [F3] (DARK) ➞ press [OK].
F2
F3
OK
The display returns to the USER SETTINGS menu.
NOTE
The density level indicated with an arrow in each display shown above is the default
density control setting.
Reset
5
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
10
Adjusting the Scanning Density
10-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the RX Password
Follow the procedure below to set the reception password.
When another fax sends a document without ITU-T subaddress, its password will
be confirmed.
If the password does not match the password you set here, or no password is set
for the document sent by another fax, this machine will not receive the document.
When receiving in memory boxes, their passwords have the priority even if you set
an RX password here.
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions].
The ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
10
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <07 SYSTEM
SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
If a system administrator’s ID and password are set, enter them after selecting
<07 SYSTEM SETTINGS>. (See Chapter 6, “System Manager Settings,” in the
Reference Guide.)
OK
The SYSTEM SETTINGS menu appears.
Setting the RX Password
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-12
F3
F4
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 RX PASSWORD> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The RX PASSWORD menu appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Enter the RX password (up to 20 digits) using the numeric
keys ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the SYSTEM SETTINGS menu.
NOTE
•
•
The RX password can be up to 20 digits long, and can include *, #, and spaces.
If you enter a wrong number, use the cursor keys to go back to the position you
want to correct ➞ press
(Delete) ➞ enter the correct number.
F4
•
To delete the entire entry, press
(DELETE) or
(Clear).
Reset
6
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
10
Setting the RX Password
10-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Confirming the Other Party’s Fax Number
Follow the procedure below to set the machine to check the fax number of the
receiving party before sending documents.
Using this feature, the machine checks the last 6 numbers of the fax number
registered on the receiving machine to verify it matches the last 6 numbers of the
fax number you dial. This can be useful when, for example, the phone company
inadvertently connects the machine to a wrong number, in which case the fax
transmission can be aborted.
You can set whether or not to cancel sending if the fax numbers do not match.
NOTE
The default setting is ‘01 OFF’.
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
OK
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <07 SYSTEM
SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
10
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
If a system administrator’s ID and password are set, enter them after selecting
<07 SYSTEM SETTINGS>. (See Chapter 6, “System Manager Settings,” in the
Reference Guide.)
The SYSTEM SETTINGS menu appears.
Confirming the Other Party’s Fax Number
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-14
F3
F4
3
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 PHONE NO.
CHECK> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The PHONE NO. CHECK menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 OFF> or <02 ON> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The display returns to the SYSTEM SETTINGS menu.
Reset
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
10
Confirming the Other Party’s Fax Number
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-15
Changing the Fax Default Settings
The standard mode is the combination of functions the machine resumes when
[Reset] is pressed.
Follow the procedure below to adjust the standard mode to suit your needs.
NOTE
•
The standard mode is resumed when:
- you press FAX (FAX) to switch to the fax mode
- the machine finishes scanning documents
- the auto clear function works in the fax mode
- the registration/setting operation is finished
The following six items can be adjusted for the standard mode:
- RESOLUTION
•
- SCAN DENSITY
- IMAGEQUALITY
- BOOK TX SCAN SIZE
- TX MODE
- TX STAMP
Additional Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
10
OK
F3
F4
2
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <07 SYSTEM
SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
If a system administrator’s ID and password are set, enter them after selecting
<07 SYSTEM SETTINGS>. (See Chapter 6, “System Manager Settings,” in the
Reference Guide.)
Changing the Fax Default Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-16
The SYSTEM SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
3
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <04 FAX DEFAULT> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The FAX DEFAULT menu appears.
F3
F4
If you want to set the resolution, press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <01 RESOLUTION> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The RESOLUTION menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 OFF>, or highlight
the desired resolution level ➞ press [OK].
10
<01 OFF>: No setting will be specified as default. The machine will retain the
most recently used setting.
OK
<02 STANDARD>: For normal printed or typewritten text (200 dpi x 100 dpi)
<03 FINE>: Twice the STANDARD resolution (200 dpi x 200 dpi)
<04 SUPER FINE>: Four times the STANDARD resolution (200 dpi x 400 dpi)
<05 ULTRA FINE>: Eight times the STANDARD resolution (400 dpi x 400 dpi)
The display returns to the FAX DEFAULT menu.
Changing the Fax Default Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-17
F3
F4
6
7
If you want to set the scanning density, press [F3] (▼) or [F4]
(▲) to highlight <02 SCAN DENSITY> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The SCAN DENSITY menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 OFF>, or highlight
the desired scanning density level ➞ press [OK].
<01 OFF>: No setting will be specified as default. The machine will retain the
most recently used setting.
OK
<02 LIGHT>: Select for sending a document that contains normal printed or
typewritten text.
<03 STANDERD>: Select for sending a document that contains both text and
halftone images, such as photographs.
<04 DARK>: Select for sending a document that contains halftone images only,
such as photographs.
The display returns to the FAX DEFAULT menu.
10
F3
F4
8
If you want to set the image quality, press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲)
to highlight <03 IMAGEQUALITY> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The IMAGEQUALITY menu appears.
Changing the Fax Default Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-18
F3
F4
9
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 OFF>, or highlight
the image quality of your document ➞ press [OK].
<01 OFF>: No setting will be specified as default. The machine will retain the
most recently used setting.
OK
<02 TEXT>: Select for sending a document that contains normal printed or
typewritten text.
<03 TEXT/PHOTO>: Select for sending a document that contains both text and
halftone images, such as photographs.
<04 PHOTO>: Select for sending a document that contains halftone images only,
such as photographs.
The display returns to the FAX DEFAULT menu.
F3
F4
10 If you want to set the book scan size for a transmission, press
[F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <04 BOOK TX SCAN SIZE> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The BOOK TX SCAN SIZE menu appears.
10
F3
F4
11 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight the book transmission
scanning size ➞ press [OK].
OK
The display returns to the FAX DEFAULT menu.
Changing the Fax Default Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-19
F3
F4
12 If you want to set the transmission mode, press [F3] (▼) or
[F4] (▲) to highlight <05 TX MODE> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The TX MODE menu appears.
F3
F4
13 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to select either <01 MEMORY
SENDING> or <02 DIRECT SENDING> ➞ press [OK].
<01 MEMORY SENDING>: Scans all pages into memory, and then sends them.
OK
<02 DIRECT SENDING>: Starts scanning the document and sends the
document one page at a time without storing the document into memory.
The display returns to the FAX DEFAULT menu.
F3
F4
14 If you want your documents stamped after every
transmission, press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <06 TX
STAMP> ➞ press [OK].
OK
10
The TX STAMP menu appears.
Changing the Fax Default Settings
10-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F3
F4
15 Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 TX STAMP OFF> or
<02 TX STAMP ON> ➞ press [OK].
<01 TX STAMP OFF>: Does not stamp documents after they are scanned.
<02 TX STAMP ON>: Stamps documents after they are scanned.
OK
The display returns to the SYSTEM SETTINGS menu.
Reset
16 Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
10
Changing the Fax Default Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-21
10
Changing the Fax Default Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-22
Dual Line Functions (Optional)
11
CHAPTER
You can connect two phone lines to the machine if the optional Canon Super G3 FAX
Expansion Kit-B1 is installed. This chapter explains how to set up and use the dual line
functions on this machine.
Connecting the Telephone Lines to the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-2
Setting Up Line 2 for Fax Transmissions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-3
Registering Your Telephone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-3
Selecting the Dialing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-5
Line Selection When Sending a Fax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10
Sending a Fax on Line 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13
Cancel an Outgoing Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14
Receiving a Fax on Line 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
Cancel an Incoming Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
11-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the Telephone Lines to the Machine
Locate two RJ-11 jacks on the back of the machine with the Canon Super G3 FAX
Expansion Kit-B1 already installed. Connect your primary phone line to the top slot
(Line 1) marked with an [L] icon. Connect the other line to the bottom slot (Line 2),
also marked with an [L] icon. The physical connection of the phone lines to the
machine is now complete.
Line 1
Line 2
Line 1 and Line 2 have the following functional differences:
Line 1 (the top slot): All fax functions are available for use on Line 1.
Line 2 (the bottom slot): Telephone information services are not available on Line 2.
NOTE
11
You can designate a dedicated line for all incoming faxes.You can also set a preferred
line for outgoing fax transmissions when both lines are available at the time a fax is sent.
Connecting the Telephone Lines to the Machine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-2
Setting Up Line 2 for Fax Transmissions
This section shows how to set up Line 2 for fax transmissions.
Registering Your Telephone Number
You can register your phone number in the machine.
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions].
The ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
11
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 USER SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The USER SETTINGS menu appears.
Setting Up Line 2 for Fax Transmissions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-3
F3
F4
4
5
6
7
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 TEL LINE
SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The LINE SELECTION menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 LINE 2> ➞ press
[OK].
OK
The TEL LINE SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 USER TEL NO.> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The USER TEL NO. menu appears.
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Use the numeric keys to enter your fax number ➞ press [OK].
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
11
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
Your fax number is registered, and the display returns to the TEL LINE SETTINGS
menu.
Setting Up Line 2 for Fax Transmissions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-4
Reset
8
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Selecting the Dialing Mode
You can set the dialing mode on Line 2 to either Tone or Pulse. Make sure the
correct mode is selected or you will not be able to dial the other party.
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions].
The ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 USER SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
11
OK
The USER SETTINGS menu appears.
Setting Up Line 2 for Fax Transmissions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-5
F3
F4
4
5
6
7
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 TEL LINE
SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The LINE SELECTION menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 LINE 2> ➞ press
[OK].
OK
The TEL LINE SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 TEL LINE TYPE> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The TEL LINE TYPE menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 TOUCH TONE> or
<02 ROTARY PULSE> ➞ press [OK].
11
OK
The display returns to the TEL LINE SETTINGS menu.
Setting Up Line 2 for Fax Transmissions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-6
Reset
8
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
NOTE
Contact your local phone company if the dialing mode is unknown.
Changing the Start Speed
If a fax transmission does not start due to poor line conditions, you can change fax
transmission speeds.
NOTE
The default setting is ‘33600bps‘.
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions].
The ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
11
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 USER SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The USER SETTINGS menu appears.
Setting Up Line 2 for Fax Transmissions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-7
F3
F4
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 TEL LINE
SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The LINE SELECTION menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 LINE 2> ➞ press
[OK].
OK
The TEL LINE SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
6
7
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 TX START SPEED>
or <04 RX START SPEED> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The TX START SPEED or RX START SPEED menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight a desired TX or RX start
speed ➞ press [OK].
11
OK
TX/RX start speed is registered, and the display returns to the TEL LINE
SETTINGS menu.
NOTE
If you find that the telephone line is in poor condition, select a slower TX/RX start
speed.
Setting Up Line 2 for Fax Transmissions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-8
Reset
8
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
11
Setting Up Line 2 for Fax Transmissions
11-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Line Selection When Sending a Fax
You can select a preferred line for sending faxes or disable the transmission of
outgoing faxes altogether.
NOTE
The default setting is ‘01 AUTO‘.
Additional Functions
1
2
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
OK
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 USER SETTINGS>
➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
11
The USER SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <08 TX LINE
SELECTION> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The TX LINE SELECTION menu appears.
Line Selection When Sending a Fax
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-10
F3
F4
4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 AUTO> or <02
MAN.> ➞ press [OK].
OK
● If you select <01 AUTO>:
F3
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 LINE 1> or <02 LINE 2> ➞ press
[OK].
F4
OK
The display for the Line you have selected appears.
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 PRIMARY>, <02 SECONDARY> or
<03 PROHIBIT TX> ➞ press [OK].
<01 PRIMARY>: The specified line will be preferably used for outgoing faxes
when both lines are available.
OK
<02 SECONDARY>: The specified line will be used for outgoing faxes when
the primary line is in use.
<03 PROHIBIT TX>: The specified line will never be used for outgoing faxes.
The display returns to the FAX SETTINGS menu.
● If you select <02 MAN.>:
11
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 DEFAULT TEL LINE> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The DEFAULT TEL LINE menu appears.
Line Selection When Sending a Fax
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-11
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 LINE 1> or <02 LINE 2> ➞ press
[OK].
OK
The display returns to the FAX SETTINGS menu.
Reset
5
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
11
Line Selection When Sending a Fax
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-12
Sending a Fax on Line 2
This section outlines how to send a fax on Line 2. Note that if you disabled fax
be able to send a fax on Line 2.
IMPORTANT
If you specified <01 AUTO> in the TX LINE SELECTION menu, you will not be able to
switch lines manually with
the line for outgoing faxes.
(Line/Mail) because the machine will automatically select
1
Press [FAX].
FAX
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
Line/Mail
2
3
4
Press [Line/Mail] to display <LINE 2>.
If you have selected <LINE 2> in the DEFAULT TEL LINE menu according to the
not required.
Place your documents on the machine.
11
NOTE
•
•
You can also specify a sender’s name with
(TTI Selector). (See “Sending a
Set the sending mode.
Sending a Fax on Line 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-13
5
6
Specify the destinations.
• You can send the same document to a maximum of 210 destinations, at 70
preset times.
• You can specify multiple destinations to be sent at a preset time (delayed
sequential broadcasting). (See “Sequential Broadcasting to More Than One
•
If you make a mistake, when entering a number press
number again.
(Clear) ➞ enter the
Start
Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning the document.
Cancel an Outgoing Fax
If you press [Stop] when the machine is sending faxes on both lines, you will be
prompted on the screen to choose which of the two transactions you would like to
cancel.
F2
F3
F4
1
Press [F2] (▼) or [F3] (▲) to highlight he transmission you
wish to cancel ➞ press [F4] (CANCEL).
11
Sending a Fax on Line 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-14
Receiving a Fax on Line 2
You can receive document transmissions automatically.
NOTE
Cancel an Incoming Fax
Press [Stop] to cancel an incoming fax transmission. If you press [Stop] when the
machine is receiving faxes on both lines, you will be prompted on the screen to
choose which of the two transactions you wish to cancel. Select and confirm the
transmission you wish to cancel.
11
Receiving a Fax on Line 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-15
11
Receiving a Fax on Line 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-16
Printing Reports and Lists
12
CHAPTER
This chapter explains how to print various reports and lists from your machine.
Setting Reports to Print Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-2
Confidential RX Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5
Activity Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-7
Printing the Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-10
Printing the Confidential Reception List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-11
Printing the List of Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-12
12-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Reports to Print Automatically
This section describes how to print the reports of the TX/RX results or of TX/RX in
the memory boxes automatically.
TX Reports
Follow the procedure below to select whether to print the TX reports automatically.
You can also set to print reports only when a transmission error occurs.
NOTE
•
•
•
•
You can set whether or not to print the TX image on the reports.
You can check if the document was sent to the other party correctly using the TX reports.
The default setting is ‘01 OUTPUT NO’.
Additional Functions
1
Press Additional Functions.
The ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS menu appears.
F3
F4
2
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
12
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
Setting Reports to Print Automatically
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-2
F3
F4
3
4
5
6
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 REPORT
SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The REPORT SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 TX REPORT> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The TX REPORT menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 OUTPUT NO>, <02
PRINT ERROR ONLY>, or <03 OUTPUTYES> ➞ press [OK].
OK
If you have selected <01 OUTPUT NO>, the setting is complete.
F3
F4
If you have highlighted <02 PRINT ERROR ONLY> or <03
OUTPUTYES> in step 5, press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight
<01 OFF> or <02 ON> for <REPORT WITH TX IMAGE> ➞ press
[OK].
OK
12
The display returns to the REPORT SETTINGS menu.
Setting Reports to Print Automatically
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-3
Reset
7
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
RX Reports
Follow the procedure below to select whether to print the RX reports automatically.
You can also set to print reports only when an error occurs during receiving.
NOTE
•
•
You can check if the document was received correctly from the other party using the RX
reports.
•
The default setting is ‘01 OUTPUT NO’.
Additional Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
OK
F3
F4
2
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 REPORT
SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The REPORT SETTINGS menu appears.
12
Setting Reports to Print Automatically
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-4
F3
F4
3
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 RX REPORT> ➞
press [OK].
OK
The RX REPORT menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 OUTPUT NO>, <02
PRINT ERROR ONLY>, or <03 OUTPUTYES> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The display returns to the REPORT SETTINGS menu.
Reset
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Confidential RX Reports
Follow the procedure below to select whether to print the confidential RX report
automatically.You can check if confidential documents were sent correctly from the
other party, or received properly without an error, using the confidential RX reports.
NOTE
•
•
The default setting is ‘02 OUTPUT YES’.
Additional Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
12
F3
F4
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
OK
Setting Reports to Print Automatically
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-5
F3
F4
2
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 REPORT
SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The REPORT SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
3
4
5
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 CONFID. RX
REPORT> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The CONFID. RX REPORT menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 OUTPUT NO> or <02
OUTPUTYES> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The display returns to the REPORT SETTINGS menu.
Reset
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
12
Setting Reports to Print Automatically
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-6
Activity Reports
Follow the procedure below to select whether to print the activity reports
automatically.
NOTE
•
•
•
You can check the list of TX/RX results using an activity report.
As default settings, <AUTO PRINT> is set to ‘01 ON’, <DAILY REPORT TIME> to ‘01
OFF’, and <TX/RX SEPARATE> to ‘01 OFF’.
Additional Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to
highlight <03 FAX SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
OK
The FAX SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
2
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 REPORT
SETTINGS> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The REPORT SETTINGS menu appears.
F3
F4
12
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <04 ACTIVITY REPORT>
➞ press [OK].
OK
The ACTIVITY REPORT menu appears.
Setting Reports to Print Automatically
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-7
F3
F4
4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight the item you want to set.
● To select <01 AUTO PRINT>:
❑ Follow the procedure below to set whether to print an activity report
automatically when the transactions reach 40.
F3
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 AUTO PRINT> ➞ press [OK].
F4
OK
The AUTO PRINT menu appears.
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 ON> or <02 OFF> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The display returns to the ACTIVITY REPORT menu.
● To select <02 DAILY REPORT TIME>:
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 DAILY REPORT TIME> ➞ press
[OK].
OK
The DAILY REPORT TIME menu appears.
12
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 OFF> or <02 ON> ➞ press [OK].
OK
If you have selected <02 ON>, the display for entering the report time appears.
Setting Reports to Print Automatically
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-8
@.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
❑ Enter the time you want to print an activity report using the numeric keys ➞
GHI
JKL
MNO
press [OK].
4
PRS
7
5
TUV
8
6
WXY
9
OPER
SYMBOLS
0
OK
The display returns to the ACTIVITY REPORT menu.
● To select <03 TX/RX SEPARATE>:
❑ Follow the procedure below to set whether to print an activity report separately
for sending and receiving.
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 TX/RX SEPARATE> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The TX/RX SEPARATE menu appears.
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 OFF> or <02 ON> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The display returns to the FAX SETTINGS menu.
Reset
5
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
12
Setting Reports to Print Automatically
12-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing the Activity Report
Follow this procedure to print a list of the previous 40 transactions on your machine.
An activity report contains the start time of the transaction, destination, sender
name, transaction number, transaction mode, total number of pages transmitted,
and transmission result, of each transaction.
NOTE
1
2
Press [FAX].
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
FAX
Open all three one-touch speed dialing panels ➞ press
[Report].
Report
The REPORT menu appears on the display.
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 ACTIVITY REPORT>
➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
12
The activity report is printed.
Printing the Activity Report
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-10
Printing the Confidential Reception List
Follow the procedure below to print a list of documents received in the confidential
mailbox.
1
2
Press [FAX].
FAX
lights, and the machine enters the Fax Basic Features screen.
FAX
Open all three one-touch speed dialing panels ➞ press
[Report].
Report
The REPORT menu appears on the display.
F3
F4
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <05 CONF. MAILBOX
LIST> ➞ press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
12
The list of the documents in the confidential mailbox is printed, and the display
returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.
Printing the Confidential Reception List
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-11
Printing the List of Fax Settings
This section describes the procedure to print these lists by pressing [Additional
Functions] and entering the PRINT LISTS menu, but you can print them also by
pressing [Report] under the one-touch speed dialing panels. However, you cannot
print the DEPT. INFO LIST by pressing [Report].
Follow the procedure below to print the lists of the contents you registered and set
in the FAX SETTINGS menu.
You can print the following lists:
Item
Description
USER DATA LIST
Prints all the settings of the machine.
Prints the standard list of all the one-touch speed dialing
keys registered with numbers.
1-TOUCH LIST 1
Prints a detailed list of all the one-touch speed dialing keys
registered with numbers.
1-TOUCH LIST 2
Prints the standard list of all the coded speed dialing codes
registered with numbers.
CODED DIAL LIST 1
CODED DIAL LIST 2
Prints a detailed list of all the coded speed dialing codes
registered with numbers.
Prints a list of groups registered under one-touch speed
dialing keys and coded speed dialing codes.
GROUP DIAL LIST
ACCESS CODE LIST
DEPT. INFO LIST
Prints the list of all access codes.
Prints the list of number of pages printed, sent or received by
each department.
You can also turn OFF the printing of the lists.
NOTE
12
Reference Guide.
Additional Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions].
The ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS menu appears.
Printing the List of Fax Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-12
F3
F4
2
3
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <08 PRINT LISTS> ➞
press [OK].
F3
F4
Each time you press
becomes highlighted.
(▼) or
(▲), the next or previous menu option
OK
The PRINT LISTS menu appears.
F3
F4
Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight the list you want to print.
● To print the user data list:
F3
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 USER DATA> ➞ press [OK].
F4
OK
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen, and the user data list is
printed.
● To print the one-touch speed dialing list 1 or 2, or coded speed
dialing list 1 or 2:
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 PRINT ADD. LISTS> ➞ press [OK].
OK
12
The PRINT ADD. LISTS menu appears.
Printing the List of Fax Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-13
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight the list you want to print ➞ press [OK].
OK
The optional settings for printing are displayed.
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <01 NO SORT> or <02 SORT> ➞ press
[OK].
OK
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen, and the selected list is
printed.
NOTE
If you select <02 SORT>, the destination names will be printed first in numeric
order and then in alphabetical order.
● To print the group dialing list:
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 PRINT ADD. LISTS> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The PRINT ADD. LISTS menu appears.
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <05 GROUP DIAL LIST> ➞ press [OK].
OK
12
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen, and the group dialing list
is printed.
Printing the List of Fax Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-14
● To print the access code list:
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <02 PRINT ADD. LISTS> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The PRINT ADD. LISTS menu appears.
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <06 ACCESS CODE LIST> ➞ press
[OK].
OK
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen, and the access code list
is printed.
● To print the department information list:
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <03 DEPT. INFO LIST> ➞ press [OK].
OK
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen, and the department
information list is printed.
● To cancel printing of lists:
F3
F4
❑ Press [F3] (▼) or [F4] (▲) to highlight <04 CANCEL REPORT> ➞ press [OK].
OK
12
F2
F3
F4
❑ When you are printing multiple lists, press [F2] (▼) or [F3] (▲) to highlight the
list waiting to be printed shown in the display ➞ press [F4] (CANCEL).
Printing the List of Fax Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-15
F3
❑ Press [F3] (YES).
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen, and the printing of the
selected list is canceled.
Reset
4
Press [Reset] to return to the Fax Basic Features screen.
12
Printing the List of Fax Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-16
Troubleshooting
13
CHAPTER
This chapter highlights any problems that may occur during the operation of the fax functions,
and solutions that may be helpful in fixing them.
When Problems Occur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-2
Receiving Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5
Other Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-7
Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-8
Questions and Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-13
13-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When Problems Occur
If an error occurs during sending or receiving, or there is an abnormality in the
machine, check the following points.
Sending Documents
You cannot send a document after dialing.
Cause 1
Remedy
Cause 2
Remedy
Cause 3
Remedy
Cause 4
Remedy
Is your machine set to the correct telephone line type (pulse or tone)?
Check the telephone line type and set the machine to the correct type.
Is your machine in copy mode?
Press [FAX] to light the FAX indicator.
Is the document set properly?
Reset the document and try sending again.
Did you dial the right telephone number?
Try dialing the number again. If the number is registered for one-touch or coded
speed dialing, check that the number is correct.
Cause 5
Remedy
Cause 6
Remedy
Is the other party’s fax machine out of paper?
Contact the other party to check whether their fax machine is out of paper.
Is the other party’s line busy with sending, receiving, or a voice call?
Contact your carrier to check whether the line is busy or not.
Memory fills up immediately when you try to send.
Cause 1
Are you sending with the resolution set to ‘SUPER FINE’ or ‘ULTRA FINE’, or
image quality set to ‘PHOTO’ or ‘TEXT/PHOTO’?
13
Remedy 1 If your document does not contain fine text or photographs, set the resolution to
‘STANDARD’ and image quality to ‘TEXT’.
Remedy 2 If your document contains fine text or photographs, send it directly rather than
using a memory transmission.
When Problems Occur
13-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cause 2
Remedy
Is a document occupying your memory space?
Either print out any documents received in memory or wait until any documents
stored in memory for sending have been sent, then resend your document.
Documents are streaked with lines when they print on the other party’s fax machine.
Cause
Is your machine’s platen glass clean?
Remedy
Copy a document on your machine and see if the document is streaked or dirty.
If the copy is streaked, clean the scanning glass.
Your documents are printed out at a reduced size on the other party’s fax machine.
Cause 1
Remedy
Cause 2
Remedy
Are your slide guides adjusted for the size of the document you are faxing?
Adjust the guides to the size of the document you are faxing and resend.
Is the other party’s paper smaller than the size of the document you sent?
If the other party is using small-size paper, your machine automatically reduces
the size of the document in accordance with the other party’s paper.
Part of the document is cut off when the other party receives it.
Cause
Is your document set in the correct direction?
Remedy
Set your document in the correct direction and resend.
The documents you sent are too light.
Cause 1
Remedy
Cause 2
Remedy
Cause 3
Remedy
Is the density set to ‘LIGHT’?
Select ‘DARK’ for the ‘DENSITY’ setting.
Is the image quality set to ‘PHOTO’ or ‘TEXT/PHOTO’?
Select ‘TEXT’ for the ‘IMAGEQUALITY’ setting.
Is your machine’s platen glass clean?
Copy a document on your machine and see if the document is streaked or dirty.
If the copy is streaked, clean the platen glass.
13
When Problems Occur
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-3
You cannot perform polling.
Cause
Is the polling box set?
Remedy
For polling to send, the polling box must first be set. Set the polling box and
resend the document.
You cannot perform confidential sending.
Cause 1
Remedy
Has the other party set up a confidential mailbox in memory?
Contact the other party and resend on confirmation that their confidential
mailbox is set.
Cause 2
Does the other party’s fax machine support ITU-T subaddress/password
transactions?
Remedy
Cause 3
Remedy
Contact the other party and check.
Did you specify the other party’s subaddress or password correctly?
Check the other party’s registered subaddress or password and specify the
same number.
Cause 4
Did you make a mistake in the subaddress or password registered for one-touch
or speed dialing?
Remedy
Cause 5
Remedy
Check your one-touch or coded speed dialing settings.
Is the memory of the other party’s machine full?
Contact the other party and check.
You cannot relay a document from another fax machine.
Cause 1
Remedy
Has the other party set up a memory box for relay transmission?
Contact the other party and resend on confirmation that they have set up a box
for relay transmission, and have registered destinations to relay to.
Cause 2
Does the other party’s fax machine support ITU-T subaddress/password
transactions?
13
Remedy
Cause 3
Remedy
Contact the other party and check.
Did you specify the other party’s subaddress or password correctly?
Check the other party’s registered subaddress or password and specify the
same number.
When Problems Occur
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-4
Cause 4
Did you make a mistake in the subaddress or password registered for one-touch
or speed dialing?
Remedy
Cause 5
Remedy
Check your one-touch or coded speed dialing settings.
Is the memory of the other fax machine full?
Contact the other party and check.
You cannot send a document with a subaddress/password.
Cause 1
Does the other party’s fax machine support ITU-T subaddress/password
transactions?
Remedy
Cause 2
Remedy
Contact the other party and check.
Did you specify the other party’s subaddress or password correctly?
Check the other party’s registered subaddress or password and specify the
same number.
Cause 3
Did you make a mistake in the subaddress or password registered for one-touch
or speed dialing?
Remedy
Cause 4
Remedy
Check your one-touch or coded speed dialing settings.
Is the memory of the other party’s machine full?
Contact the other party and check.
Receiving Documents
Part of the documents you receive are cut off.
Cause 1
Remedy
Cause 2
Remedy
Cause 3
Remedy
Are the slide guides in your stack bypass set to the size of the paper?
Set the guides in the stack bypass to the size of the paper.
Have you specified the correct stack bypass paper size?
Specify the correct stack bypass paper size.
Is the ROTATE PRINT mode set to ‘OFF’?
13
Set the ROTATE PRINT mode to ‘ON’.
When Problems Occur
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-5
The documents you received are of poor quality.
Cause 1
Remedy
Is your toner cartridge running low on toner?
Remove your toner cartridge and gently tilt it from side to side five or six times
to redistribute the remaining toner. If this does not solve the problem, replace
with a new toner cartridge.
Cause 2
Remedy
Is the platen glass of the other party’s fax machine clean?
Copy a document on your machine. If the document is clean, the problem lies
with the sender’s fax machine. Contact the sender, and ask them to clean their
fax machine.
Your machine switches to memory substitution reception even though paper is present.
Cause
Are the setting options to select the DRAWER ELIGIBLTY correct?
Correct the fax reception options for selecting the DRAWER ELIGIBLTY.
Remedy
You cannot receive a confidential document in your confidential mailbox.
Cause 1
Remedy
Cause 2
Is a confidential mailbox set?
Check your confidential mailbox settings.
Did the other party specify the correct subaddress and password for your
confidential mailbox?
Remedy
Contact the other party and check.
You cannot perform polling.
Cause 1
Remedy
Did you specify the other party’s subaddress or password correctly?
Check the other party’s registered subaddress or password and specify the
same number.
Cause 2
Remedy
Cause 3
Remedy
Is the other party’s fax machine set to automatic reception?
Contact the other party and check.
Is a document set on the other party’s machine?
Contact the other party and check.
13
When Problems Occur
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-6
Other Problems
Sending and receiving of documents is too slow.
Cause 1
Remedy
Is the resolution set to ‘FINE’, ‘SUPER FINE’, or ‘ULTRA FINE’?
Setting the resolution to ‘STANDARD’ reduces the sending time. However, any
fine text in the document will also be harder to read.
Cause 2
Remedy
Cause 3
Remedy
Is the picture quality set to ‘PHOTO’ or ‘TEXT/PHOTO’?
Press [F3] (IMAGEQUALITY) to select ‘TEXT’.
Is ECM (Error Correction Mode) set to ‘ON’?
Because ECM corrects errors during a transmission, any problems on the line
can mean that the transmission will take extra time. Set ECM to ‘OFF’.
You cannot get documents from information services.
Cause 1
Remedy
Cause 2
Remedy
Is your machine set to the tone dialing type of the telephone line?
Press [Tone] to set the dialing type to ‘TONE’.
Were there any instructions from the other party, such as to set to receive?
Just before receiving, press [Start].
You cannot perform transactions using memory boxes.
Cause
Did you specify the other party’s subaddress or password correctly?
Specify a different subaddress for each memory box.
Remedy
13
When Problems Occur
13-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Codes
If errors occur during sending or receiving, they are recorded in reports as error
codes.
#0001
Cause
A document may be jammed.
Remove the jammed document.
Remedy
#0003
Cause 1
An attempt was made to send a document of 3.3 feet (1 meter) or longer from
the feeder.
Remedy
Cause 2
Remedy
Cause 3
Remedy
Divide the document into smaller parts and send from the platen glass.
A document takes a long time to send because it contains too much data.
Reduce the scanning resolution before sending.
A document takes a long time to receive.
Contact the other party and ask them to reduce their scanning resolution or
divide the document into smaller parts for sending.
#0005
Cause
No reply is received from the other party’s fax machine.
Try sending once again from the beginning.
The other party is not using a G3 fax machine.
Contact the other party to check.
Remedy
Cause
Remedy
#0008
13
Cause
The passwords did not match at polling sending.
Check with the other party.
Remedy
Error Codes
13-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
#0009
Cause
The paper has run out or the paper drawer is not set properly.
Load the paper or reset the drawer properly.
Remedy
#0011
Cause 1
Remedy
Cause 2
The document for sending was not set properly.
Try again from the beginning.
Polling reception did not work because no document was set on the other
party’s fax machine.
Remedy
#0012
Contact the other party and ask them to set the document on their fax machine.
Cause
You could not send because the other party’s fax machine is out of paper.
Contact the other party and ask them to load the paper.
Remedy
#0018
Cause
There is no reply when you redial.You could not send because your fax signal
was not returned as the other party’s line was engaged.
Remedy
Check that the other party’s line is not engaged and try again from the
beginning.
#0021
Cause
You could not poll to receive a document because the other party’s fax machine
would not respond.
Remedy
Check with the other party and try again from the beginning.
#0022
Cause
Your machine was set for polling to receive from several parties but the one-
touch or coded speed dialing registrations used when specifying the other
parties were deleted.
13
Remedy
Check with the parties who could not perform polling to receive and re-enter
your settings for polling to receive.
Error Codes
13-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
#0025
Cause
A transmission requiring subaddress registration is set for one-touch or coded
speed dialing but the subaddress is not registered.
Remedy
Register the subaddress.
#0033
Cause
You could not send using confidential transmission because the other party’s
fax machine does not support the use of subaddresses.
Remedy
Check with the other party.
#0034
Cause
You could not send using confidential transmission because the other party’s
fax machine would not receive.
Remedy
Check with the other party and try again from the beginning.
#0035
Cause
You could not send using relay transmission because the other party’s fax
machine does not support the use of subaddresses.
Remedy
Check with the other party.
#0036
Cause
You could not send using relay transmission because the other party’s fax
machine would not receive.
Remedy
#0037
Check with the other party and try again from the beginning.
Cause
The machine’s memory is full.
Remedy
Print out the documents stored in memory as a result of memory substitution
reception or confidential reception.
13
Error Codes
13-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
#0059
Cause
Your transmission is canceled because the number you dialed was different
from the number registered on the other party’s fax machine.
Remedy
Check to see that the correct fax number is registered on the other party’s fax
machine. Or, set your SYSTEM SETTINGS not to confirm the other party’s
number.
#0080
Cause
You could not send because the other party’s fax machine does not support the
use of subaddresses.
Remedy
Check with the other party.
#0081
Cause
You could not send because the other party’s fax machine does not support the
use of passwords.
Remedy
Check with the other party.
#0082
Cause
You could not poll to receive a document because the other party’s fax machine
does not support the use of subaddresses.
Remedy
Check with the other party.
#0083
Cause
When you polled the other party to receive a document, your subaddresses or
passwords did not match those of the other party.
Remedy
Check with the other party.
#0084
Cause
You could not poll the other party to receive a document because the other
party’s fax machine does not support the use of passwords.
13
Remedy
Check with the other party.
Error Codes
13-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
#0102
Cause
When you tried to send a document, your subaddresses or passwords did not
match those of the other party.
Remedy
#0995
Check with the other party.
Cause
Communication reservation is cleared.
If necessary, try again from the beginning.
Remedy
13
Error Codes
13-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers
This section tells you in Q & A format about convenient functions of your machine
and how to avoid trouble.
Q Can I resend the document automatically when sending has failed?
A Set AUTO REDIAL to ‘ON’ in the TX SETTINGS menu.You can also set redial options,
such as redial times and intervals.
Q What happens if a document is received when in the Energy Saver mode?
A The machine automatically receives and prints the document.
Q What happens if a document is sent by facsimile during copying?
A You do not need to do anything. Continue copying.
The machine automatically receives the document and stores it in built-in memory.
When copying is complete, printing of the document starts automatically.
Q Can I automatically reset the resolution to ‘FINE’ when the power is turned ON or after
transmission, because I usually want to send with the FINE resolution.
A You can register your favorite resolution, image quality and density settings as default
settings in the FAX DEFAULT menu.
Q If a paper jam occurs during printing a received document, what happens to the
document?
A The machine keeps in memory the document that is not printed out correctly. Remove
the jammed paper, and printing will restart from the page at which paper jamming
occurred.
13
Questions and Answers
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-13
Q If a power failure occurs, what happens to the documents stored in memory?
A The machine retains the documents stored in memory for about 1 hour (the time
depends on the memory capacity) even if a power failure continues. The contents of the
directory are retained as well.
If a power failure occurs during receiving, however, the document being received is not
stored in memory.
Q Can I turn OFF the power of the machine when I use the delayed sending?
A You can set the machine to the power saving mode by pressing [Energy Saver], if
necessary. Keep the main power switch ‘ON’.
The document for which you have set the delayed sending will be automatically sent
from the memory of the machine at the preset time.
13
Questions and Answers
13-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Summary of Important Settings
14
CHAPTER
This chapter details a summery of important settings for your machine.
Fax Settings Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
14-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fax Settings Table
The following items can be set or registered using FAX SETTINGS menu in the
Additional Functions menu.
NOTE
Depending on the optional equipment you install for the machine, some of the items may
not be displayed or cannot be selected.
■ FAX SETTINGS
Applicable
Item
Settings
Page
USER TEL NO.
TEL LINE TYPE:TOUCH TONE, ROTARY PULSE
TEL LINE
SETTINGS
TX START SPEED: 14400bps, 9600bps,
7200bps, 4800bps, 2400bps, 33600bps*
RX START SPEED: 14400bps, 9600bps,
7200bps, 4800bps, 2400bps, 33600bps*
UNIT NAME
USER
SETTINGS
SENDER NAME: 01 - 99 (SENDER NAME REG., PERSONAL
SETTINGS)
TX TERMINAL ID: FAX, I-FAX, FTP (ON*, OFF)
SENDER FAX NUMBER: USER TEL NUMBER*, OTHER FAX
NUMBERS
DENSITY CONTROL: LIGHT, STANDARD*, DARK
PROG. 1-TOUCH KEY: 01 - 63 (DO NOT USE*, USE)
TX LINE SELECTION: AUTO*, MAN.
TX REPORT: OUTPUT NO*, PRINT ERROR ONLY, OUTPUT YES
RX REPORT: OUTPUT NO*, PRINT ERROR ONLY, OUTPUT YES
CONFID. RX REPORT: OUTPUT NO, OUTPUT YES*
REPORT
SETTINGS
ACTIVITY REPORT: AUTO PRINT, DAILY REPORT TIME, TX/RX
SEPARATE
14
Fax Settings Table
14-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applicable
Page
Item
Settings
ECM TX: ON*, OFF
PAUSE TIME: 01 SEC to 15 SEC; 02 SEC*
AUTO REDIAL: ON*, OFF
ERASE FAILED TX: OFF, ON*
TIME OUT: ON*, OFF
TX SETTINGS
STAMP ACTION: DIRECT&MEMORY TX*, DIRECT TX
TX ROTATION: ON*, OFF
PIN CODE: OFF*, ON
ECM RX: ON*, OFF
RX SETTINGS RX PAGE FOOTER: OFF*, ON
2 on 1: OFF*, ON
# OF RX COPIES: 01 to 99 COPIES; 01*
SELECT DRAWER: DRAWER SW A - D (ON*, OFF)
PRINTER
SETTINGS
RX REDUCTION: ON*, OFF
TONER SUPPLY LOW: RX TO MEMORY*, KEEP PRINTING
CONFIDNTL MAILBOX: SETUP FILE, CHANGE DATA, DELETE
FILE
RELAY TX GROUP: SETUP FILE, CHANGE DATA, DELETE FILE
FILE SETTINGS
PRESET POLLING: SETUP FILE, CHANGE DATA, DELETE FILE
POLLING BOX: SETUP FILE, CHANGE DATA, DELETE FILE
TRANSFER: SETUP FILE, CHANGE DATA, DELETE FILE
MEMORY LOCK RX: OFF*, ON
RX PASSWORD
SYSTEM
PHONE NO. CHECK: OFF*, ON
SETTINGS
FAX DEFAULT: RESOLUTION, SCAN DENSITY, IMAGEQUALITY,
BOOK TX SCAN SIZE, TX MODE, TX STAMP
ACCESS CODE: USE, DO NOT USE*
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
14
Fax Settings Table
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-3
■ ADD. REGISTRATION
Applicable
Page
Item
Settings
TEL# REGISTRATION: 01 - 63 (TEL NUMBER ENTRY,
NAME, OPTIONAL SETTING)
Sending
Function
Guide
E-MAIL ADDRESS: 01 - 63 (ENTER E-MAIL ADD., NAME,
OPTIONAL SETTING)
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL
FTP SERVER: 01 - 63 (FTP SERVER NAME, NAME,
LOGIN NAME, PASSWORD, UPLOAD DIRECTORY,
OPTIONAL SETTING)
Sending
Function
Guide
TEL# REGISTRATION: 000-136 (TEL NUMBER ENTRY,
NAME, OPTIONAL SETTING)
Sending
Function
Guide
E-MAIL ADDRESS: 000-136 (ENTER E-MAIL ADD., NAME,
OPTIONAL SETTING)
CODED SPD DIAL
GROUP DIAL
FTP SERVER: 000-136 (FTP SERVER NAME, NAME,
LOGIN NAME, PASSWORD, UPLOAD DIRECTORY,
OPTIONAL SETTING)
Sending
Function
Guide
01 - 63: (one-touch speed dialing); 000 - 136 (coded speed
dialing): DESTINATION TEL/ID, NAME, OPTIONAL
SETTING
■ PRINT LISTS
Item
Applicable
Page
Settings
USER DATA
PRINT
1-TOUCH LIST 1, CODED DIAL LIST 1, 1-TOUCH LIST 2,
CODED DIAL LIST 2: NO SORT*, SORT
PRINT ADD. LIST
GROUP DIAL LIST, ACCESS CODE LIST
DEPT. INFO LIST
CANCEL REPORT
PRINT
–
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
14
Fax Settings Table
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-4
Appendix
15
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the specifications of the machine, and includes report samples, the
glossary, and index.
Report Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-2
One-Touch Speed Dialing List 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-2
One-Touch Speed Dialing List 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-2
User’s Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-6
Transmission (TX)/ Reception (RX) Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-8
Confidential Reception (RX) Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-9
Multi-Transaction (TX/RX) Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-9
Confidential Mailbox List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-10
Document Memory List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-10
Memory Clear Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-11
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-12
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-13
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-22
15-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Report Samples
You can confirm the dialing addresses, machine settings and transmission/
reception results by printing reports.
15
One-Touch Speed Dialing List 1
This lists the recipient addresses registered to all the one-touch speed dialing
codes.
One-Touch Speed Dialing List 2
This lists the detailed data of the recipient addresses registered to all the one-touch
speed dialing codes.
Report Samples
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15-2
15
Report Samples
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15-3
Coded Speed Dialing List 1
This lists the recipient addresses registered to all the coded speed dialing codes.
15
Coded Speed Dialing List 2
This lists the detailed data of the recipient addresses registered to all the coded
speed dialing codes.
Report Samples
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15-4
Activity Report
This report lists the sending and receiving transactions.
15
NOTE
If the <ESS POWER LEVEL> is set to ‘01 LOW’, the documents received in the Energy
Saver mode will be printed after the Energy Saver mode is released. In this case, the
MODE may be reported as MEMORY RX in the activity report.
Report Samples
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15-7
Confidential Reception (RX) Report
This report is printed every time the machine receives a confidential document.
15
Multi-Transaction (TX/RX) Report
This report is printed every time a sequential broadcast transmission is performed.
For how to print the report, see “Sequential Broadcasting to More Than One
Report Samples
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15-9
Relay Broadcast Report
This report is printed from the originator machine every time a relay broadcast
transmission is performed.
15
Confidential Mailbox List
This lists sending and receiving transactions using the confidential mailboxes.
Document Memory List
This lists sending and receiving transactions by TX/RX numbers.
Report Samples
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15-10
Specifications
The following are the principal specifications of the fax functions of this machine.
Specifications are subject to change without notice for product improvement or
future releases.
15
Item
Specifications
Canon Super G3 Fax Board
Name
Sending Sizes or
Original Sizes
11" × 17" to STMT
Paper Sizes or
Recording Sizes
11" × 17" to STMT
Transmission
Time
Approx. 3 sec./page* (V. 34 33.6 Kbps + ECM - MMR)
(Based on Canon FAX standard chart No. 1, standard mode)
Fax Scanning Line STANDARD: 200 × 100 dpi
Density (Scanning FINE: 200 × 200 dpi
and Transmission) SUPER FINE: 200 × 400 dpi
ULTRA FINE: 400 × 400 dpi
Applicable
Telephone Line
Subscriber telephone circuit (PSTN)
Autodial Function
200 numbers
*Approximately 3 seconds per page for transmission time based on Canon FAX standard Chart No. 1 (ECM-MMR,
Standard Mode) at 33.6 Kbps modem speed.The Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) currently supports 28.8
Kbps modem speed or lower, depending on the telephone line conditions.
Specifications
15-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
A
15
Activity report
Journal of transactions, both sent and received.
ADF
Stands for automatic document feeder.
Alarm lamp
Blinks red when a paper jam occurs or the machine is running out of toner or paper.
Automatic redialing
When the other fax is busy or does not answer, the machine waits two minutes, and
then automatically redials the same number. If there is still no answer, it makes one
more attempt after waiting another two minutes. After the last unsuccessful attempt,
the machine prints an Error TX report.
B
bps
Stands for bits per second. The measure of transmission speed used in relationship
to networks and communication lines.
Broadcasting
Transmitting a document to more than one location.
C
CCITT/ITU-T
Formally known as CCITT, Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and
Telephone. CCITT has been replaced by the International Telecommunications Unit-
Telecommunications Sector (ITU-T), a committee created to set international
standards for telecommunications.
Glossary
15-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Coded speed dialing
Enables you to automatically dial a facsimile number by pressing only four keys,
[Coded Dial] and a three-digit code.You can register up to 137 facsimile numbers for
coded speed dialing. When you register the facsimile number, you can also enter the
receiving party’s name, set the speed for the transmission, and other useful features.
Confidential mailbox
A mailbox consisting of a two-digit number between 00 and 99 in which to store
confidential documents. If the number is a single digit, precede it with a zero.
15
D
Delayed transmission
With delayed transmission (also called timer sending), you can set a time for the
document to be sent.You do not have to be in the office when the document is sent at
the specified time. With delayed transmission, you can send the same document to
more than one destination at a preset time. If you frequently send the same document
to several destinations, you can save time by using group dialing.
Density control
You can darken or lighten documents that you send or receive with keys at the top of
the operation panel.
Dialing methods
Dialing numbers at the press of one or a few keys.To use automatic dialing, you must
register the fax numbers in the memory of the machine.
• Regular dialing
• One-touch speed dialing
• Coded speed dialing
• Group dialing
• Directory dialing
• Access code dialing
Direct sending
Use direct sending if the memory is full, but you still want to send a document. Direct
sending scans and sends one page at a time. The document is not scanned into the
memory, so it takes a little more time to get your original document back.
Directory dialing
Enables you to look up the other party’s name and retrieve the number registered to
the one-touch speed dialing, coded speed dialing, or group dialing. This feature is
convenient when you know the other party’s name but cannot recall the speed dialing
number where the number is registered.
Glossary
15-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Document
The single sheet or stack of papers containing the data you want to send through or
receive from a fax machine.
Document density
The document density settings alter the lightness or darkness of the documents sent
or received. See density control.
15
Document output tray
Holds documents ejected from the machine after they have been scanned into
memory, copied, or sent by direct sending.
Dual access
Enables you to scan a document, even if the machine is copying, sending or receiving
a document.You do not have to wait until the machine finishes the current
send/receive transmission. While the machine sends a document from the memory,
you can load other documents into the memory, copy documents, print out reports, or
register information.
E
ECM
Stands for Error Correction Mode. Reduces system and line errors when sending or
receiving from another fax machine with ECM capability. When there is noise on the
telephone line, a distortion or blank area can occur in the document received by the
other party. ECM divides one page into a number of blocks and checks for lost data
block by block. When some data is lost in a certain block, ECM repeats transmission
from the beginning of that block after confirming that all data within the block can be
transmitted successfully. In this way, ECM guarantees that a good image can be
received at the receiving end. ECM is very effective in countries where the telephone
lines are in poor condition.There may be occasions when you want to turn ECM OFF.
For instance, when you feel the transaction speed is extremely slow.
F
Fax Basic Features screen
The machine is ON, and ready to use. All operations start from the Fax Basic
Features screen, where the date and time are displayed.
Fine
Use this setting for documents with very small characters and lines. It is twice the
standard resolution.
Glossary
15-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G
Group dialing
Group dialing enables you to dial up to 199 previously registered one-touch speed
dialing or coded speed dialing numbers together as a group. This means you only
need to press a one-touch speed dial key or [Coded Dial] followed by a three-digit
code to dial a large group of numbers automatically.You register each group of
facsimile numbers under a one-touch or coded speed dialing key, so make sure a key
is available before trying to register numbers for group dialing. Once a group is
defined, you can add or delete numbers to/from the group.
15
I
In Use Memory lamp
A light that blinks red or maintains a steady green light when the machine is copying
or there are documents stored in memory.
ITU-T
See also CCITT/ITU-T
J
Jack
The telephone line receptacles on your wall and on the side of the main unit used to
connect your machine to the telephone line.
L
Long distance dialing
When dialing or registering long distance numbers, you sometimes have to insert a
pause either within or after the telephone number. The destination and length of the
pause differ depending on the system. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or
your local telephone company for further information if you experience problems with
long distance dialing.
M
Manual redialing
When you use regular dialing, you can redial a number manually, simply by pressing
[Pause/Redial] on the operation panel. The last number called is the number redialed.
Glossary
15-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory box
The memory box provides features that enable you to set up an ITU-T subaddress
and password, and enables you to use advanced features, such as confidential
sending and relay sending with a fax machine of any manufacture as long as they too
support ITU-T standard subaddress/password transactions.
Memory lock
Usually a document is printed as soon as it is received, but the memory lock feature
forces all documents to be received in memory until you enter a password to print
them. This feature prevents printed documents from piling up in the paper output tray
when the office is unattended. After you return to the office, you can print all
documents stored in memory.
15
Memory sending
Scanning the document into memory before the facsimile dials the number and sends
it. Scanning is fast, and you only have to wait until the original document is scanned,
not until it is sent.You can get the original back much faster, and spend less time
standing around the fax.
O
One-touch speed dialing
Each one-touch speed dialing key holds a facsimile telephone number. After the
numbers are registered, all you have to do is press one key to dial. Up to 63 numbers
can be registered for one-touch speed dialing.
P
Pause
By pressing [Pause/Redial], you can enter a pause between digits of a telephone
number when you register the number for one-touch, or coded speed dialing, or
during regular dialing. A pause may be required for a connection to an outside line, or
some countries may require a pause for overseas fax transmissions.
Pause time
The default settings are two seconds if a pause is inserted within the number (may
vary depending on your location), and 10 seconds if added to the end of the number.
Only the length of pauses inside the numbers, and not those at the end, can be
changed.
Glossary
15-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PBX
Private Branch Exchange. An in-house telephone switching system that inter
connects telephone extensions to each other, as well as to the external telephone
network. A PBX controls the flow of telephone traffic through instruments such as
paging systems and automatic callback and dialing.
PIN code
Personal Identification Number. To prevent unauthorized access to telephone lines,
15
some PBX (Private Branch Exchange) systems require that a PIN code be entered
when dialing to make a call or to send a document. Depending on the PBX system,
the PIN code maybe entered before the number as a prefix, or after the number as a
suffix. If your PBX needs a PIN code to connect to an outside line, you can specify the
user data settings of the machine so that it prompts you every time that you dial.
Polling box
The polling box is used to store documents for polling sending in memory.The polling
box holds the scanned document in memory until the other party polls your machine
to send the document.
Polling transmission
Polling means one facsimile unit requests another to send a document. This is useful
when the sending party, the party with the original document, is not in the office, but
the document must be sent out. The receiving party dials the fax holding the original
and requests that it be sent. In other words, the receiver always polls the sender.
Before using the polling feature, you have to set up polling boxes.
Pulse
See rotary pulse.
R
Regular dialing
Dialing a number with the numeric keys. Use regular dialing to dial a number that is
not registered for any of the automatic dialing methods.
Relay broadcast
See relay sending.
Relay sending
Also called relay broadcast.You can send a document once to a fax in a distant
location, then have that fax relay your document to several other destinations in the
same area.
Glossary
15-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resolution
The density of dots for an output device like a fax, scanner, or printer. Expressed in
terms of dots per inch (dpi). Low resolution causes font characters and graphics to
have a jagged appearance. Higher resolution means smoother curves and angles, as
well as a better match to traditional typeface designs. Resolution values are
represented by horizontal data and vertical data, for example, 200 x 200 dpi.
Rotary pulse
15
A rotary pulse or pulse dial telephone is dialed by manually rotating a dial to send
pulses to the telephone switching system. When you pulse dial, you hear clicks. With
tone dialing, you hear tones.
RX password
The ITU-T password set on your machine to match the ITU-T password of all
incoming documents. If your RX password matches the ITU-T password of the
incoming transmission, the document is received. If the passwords do not match, the
document is not received. The maximum length of a password is 20 digits and may
consist of numbers, spaces, asterisks (*), and pound marks (#).
S
Scanning area
The scanning area is narrower than the original document size around the entire
border, around the document. Documents you send should have some margin on the
sides and the top and bottom. Anything over this margin cannot be scanned for
sending.
Sender’s name
Your name or company’s name, your fax number, date and time the document was
sent to the receiving party are printed on each page you send.You can register up to
99 sender names that can be selected with [TTI Selector] before sending.Your name
and facsimile number are printed at the top of the documents that you send.
Sending speed
The rate at which documents are sent over the phone line. See also bps.
Sequential broadcast
Enables you to send one scanned document to up to 210 destinations by using
one-touch speed dialing, coded speed dialing, and regular dialing. Dial several
numbers to send the document. If you do this frequently, you should register the
numbers for group dialing.
Stamp
The optional stamp feature marks documents that have been scanned for
transmission with a pink mark ( ) stamped at the bottom of the document.
Glossary
15-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Super Fine
This key increases the clarity of documents you send. The lamp shows you the
current setting. It is four times the standard resolution.
Super G3 FAX Expansion Kit-B1
The optional Super G3 FAX Expansion Kit-B1 enables you to connect two telephone
lines to the machine. Both lines can be used simultaneously for facsimile
transactions, either line can be given priority for transactions, or either line can be
temporarily disabled.
15
T
Tone/pulse setting
This setting enables you to set the machine to touch tone (T) or pulse (P) dialing,
depending on the type of phone line you have installed.
Tone
You can switch temporarily from pulse to tone dialing by pressing [Tone] before
dialing. Data services may require that you use tone dialing, so if you have a
conventional pulse dial telephone, and need to use tone dial to access the data
service, press [Tone] to tone dial on your pulse telephone line.
Transaction number
When a document is scanned into or received in memory, it is assigned a transaction
number (TX/RX).You can select documents in the memory for sending, printing, or
deleting by specifying the transaction number.
Transfer
A special feature you can set up on the machine that enables all documents received
on the main fax machine to be transferred to another fax machine. For example, you
could have the main fax machine in the office transfer all documents to your machine
at home.You can set the day and time for this feature to turn ON and OFF. Please
remember, however, that documents received in a confidential mailbox or a memory
box cannot be transferred. See also transfer password.
Transfer password
Protects the transfer settings from unauthorized access.You must enter the transfer
password, a seven-digit code, in order to view or change the transfer settings.
Transmission time
A fax transmission consists of three stages: the pre-message handshake, the
message transmission, and the post-message handshake. The transmission time
described in this manual is not the total time required for the entire transmission. It is
only the time for the message transmission. The transmission time described in this
manual is the fastest time achieved when faxes communicate in the same mode.
Glossary
15-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TTI
Stands for Transmit Terminal Identification. Also called sender information. The TTI is
the name of the person or organization, and the facsimile number of the machine that
sends a document. In addition to a unit name that you register for the machine, you
can create up to 99 sender’s names that can be selected and used in place of the unit
name when you send a facsimile transmission.
TTI Selector
15
With this feature, you can select a name to be printed at the top of the message you
send. Usually, you register your company’s name as the TTI, but you can also use
personal names.
U
Ultra Fine
This key increases the clarity of documents you send. The lamp shows you the
current setting. It is eight times the standard resolution.
Glossary
15-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Symbols
+ key, 1-6
15
D
A
Alarm lamp, 1-5
B
C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
15-22
15
G
M
H
Turning memory lock ON/OFF using
I
N
O
L
P
Index
15-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R
Setting PIN code access for speed dialing,
15
Using speed dialing with PIN code access,
Relay broadcasting memory box settings
Setting up ITU-T subaddress and
Transmission (TX)/ reception (RX) report,
Q
Index
15-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S
Automatic redialing or memory sending, 3-
15
Sending document to relay unit for relay
Sending document with subaddress/password, 4-
T
Checking and canceling delayed
Setting delayed transmission during
Automatic document deletion after failed
Sequential broadcasting to more than one
U
Index
15-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
V
15
W
Index
15-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The contents of this guide are
printed on 70% recycled paper.
CANON INC.
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
CANON U.S.A., INC.
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.
CANON CANADA INC.
6390 Dixie Road Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7, Canada
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59-61 P.O. Box 2262, 1180 EG Amstelveen, The Netherlands
CANON FRANCE S.A.
17,quai du President Paul Doumer 92414 Courbevoie Cedex, France
CANON (U.K.) LTD.
Woodhatch, Reigate, Surrey, RH2 8BF, United Kingdom
CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Europark Fichtenhain A10, 47807 Krefeld, Germany
CANON ITALIA S.p.A.
Palazzo L Strada 6 20089 Milanofiori Rozzano (MI) Italy
CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC.
703 Waterford Way, Suite 400, Miami, Florida 33126, U.S.A.
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney, N.S.W. 2113, Australia
CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.
79 Anson Road #09-01/06, Singapore 079906
CANON HONGKONG CO., LTD
9/F, The Hong Kong Club Building, 3A Chater Road, Central, Hong Kong
FA7-3246-010
062002NF
C CANON INC. 2002
PRINTED IN CHINA
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|